diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide')
134 files changed, 11154 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5bf0970ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideanchor_objectxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Positioning Objects</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147828"> + <bookmark_value>objects;anchoring options</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>positioning;objects (guide)</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>anchors;options</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>frames;anchoring options</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pictures;anchoring options</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>centering;images on HTML pages</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<h1 id="hd_id3147828" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="anchor_object"><link href="text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp" name="Positioning Objects">Positioning Objects</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id181634295881266" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">An object, such as an image or frame, is positioned within a document using an anchor attached to another element.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id41634291500513" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">An anchor determines the reference point for an object. The reference point could be the page or frame where the object is, a paragraph, or even a character. An object always has an anchor.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147251" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">An anchor moves with the element it is attached to as the document is edited. An object retains its position relative to the reference point determined by its anchor, such that, whenever the reference point moves or changes, the object moves relative to it.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id441634291545244" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The following anchoring options are available:</paragraph> + +<table id="tbl_id3147268"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145599" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">Anchoring</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145622" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">Effect</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145650" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">As character</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151181" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">Anchors the selected object as a character in the current text. If the height of the selected object is greater than the current font size, the height of the line containing the object is increased.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_idN10674" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">To center an image on an HTML page, insert the image, anchor it "as character", then center the paragraph.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151212" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">To character</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151235" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">Anchors the selected object to the paragraph that contains the character to which the anchor is attached. The reference point for the object is the start of the paragraph that contains the character.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id261634292505179" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">For example, if you split the paragraph at a point before the anchor, the reference point moves to the start of the new paragraph and the object moves relative to that point. If you join the paragraph to the one before it, the reference point moves to the start of the combined paragraph and the object moves to a position relative to that.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3155071" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">To paragraph</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3155094" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">Anchors the selected object to the current paragraph.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3155122" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">To page</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3155144" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">Anchors the selected object to the current page.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145674" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">To frame</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145697" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">Anchors the selected object to the surrounding frame.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> +<note id="par_id371654784167792"> Objects can only be positioned on the page where their anchor is located.</note> +<section id="anchor_moving"> +<h2 id="hd_id341653868751593">Moving an Anchor</h2> +<section id="anchor_moving_text"> +<paragraph id="par_id3145715" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">When you insert a shape, textbox, OLE object, image, or frame in your document, an anchor icon appears where the object is anchored. You can move an anchor or, keeping other object constraints in mind, position an object relative to the anchor's reference point by dragging the object. </paragraph> +</section> +</section> +<section id="anchor_changing"> +<h2 id="hd_id841653869348328">Changing an Anchor</h2> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id711653869372168">To change the anchoring options of an object, right-click the object, and then choose an option from the <link href="text/shared/01/05260000.xhp" name="Anchor submenu link"><menuitem>Anchor</menuitem></link> submenu.</paragraph> +</section> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..839cf20b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidearrange_chaptersxml" indexer="include"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Rearranging a Document by Using the Navigator</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149973"> +<bookmark_value>headings;rearranging</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>rearranging headings</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>moving;headings</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>demoting heading levels</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>promoting heading levels</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>Navigator;heading levels and chapters</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>arranging;headings</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>outlines;arranging chapters</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<h1 id="hd_id3149973"><variable id="arrange_chapters"><link href="text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp" name="Rearranging a Document by Using the Navigator">Arranging Chapters in the Navigator</link> </variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3147795" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can move headings and subordinate text up and down in a document text by using the Navigator. You can also promote and demote heading levels. To use this feature, format the headings in your document with one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. To use a custom paragraph style for a heading, choose <emph>Tools - Chapter Numbering</emph>, select the style in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box, and then double-click a number in the <emph>Levels</emph> list.</paragraph> +<tip id="par_id3145652">To quickly move the text cursor to a heading in the document, double-click the heading in the <emph>Navigator</emph> list.</tip> +<paragraph id="par_id3155461" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To dock the <emph>Navigator</emph>, drag the title bar to the edge of the workspace. To undock the <emph>Navigator</emph>, double-click its frame while holding the <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> key.</paragraph> + +<h3 id="hd_id3151184">To Move a Heading Up or Down in the Document</h3> +<warning id="par_id0915200809400790">Ensure that all heading levels are shown in the Navigator. By default all levels are shown. See steps below how to change the heading levels that are shown.</warning> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151206" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <emph>Standard Bar</emph>, click the <emph>Navigator</emph> icon <image id="img_id5211883" src="cmd/sc_navigator.svg" width="0.566cm" height="0.566cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id5211883">Icon navigator</alt></image> to open the <emph>Navigator</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151238" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <emph>Navigator</emph>, click the <emph>Content Navigation View</emph> icon <image id="img_id3156338" src="sw/res/sc20244.svg" width="0.566cm" height="0.566cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3156338">Icon Content Navigation View</alt></image>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155089" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" format="i"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155114" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Drag a heading to a new location in the <emph>Navigator</emph> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155139" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click a heading in the <emph>Navigator</emph> list, and then click the <emph>Promote Chapter</emph> <image id="img_id4217546" src="sw/res/sc20174.svg" width="0.566cm" height="0.566cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id4217546">Icon promote</alt></image> or <emph>Demote Chapter</emph> icon <image id="img_id6505788" src="sw/res/sc20171.svg" width="0.566cm" height="0.566cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id6505788">Icon demote</alt></image>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<note id="par_id3145758">To move the heading without the subordinate text, hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> while you drag or click the <emph>Promote Chapter</emph> or <emph>Demote Chapter</emph> icons.</note> + +<h3 id="hd_id3155402">To Promote or Demote the Level of a Heading</h3> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155424" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the heading in the <emph>Navigator</emph> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1081C" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Promote Level</emph> <image id="img_id5564488" src="sw/res/sc20172.svg" width="0.566cm" height="0.566cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id5564488">Icon promote level</alt></image> or <emph>Demote Level</emph> icon <image id="img_id3159363" src="sw/res/sc20173.svg" width="0.566cm" height="0.566cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3159363">Icon demote level</alt></image>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h3 id="hd_id3155525">To Change the Number of Heading Levels That Are Displayed</h3> +<paragraph id="par_id3151352" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Heading Levels Shown</emph> icon <image id="img_id3151310" src="sw/res/sc20236.png" width="0.566cm" height="0.566cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3151310">Icon heading levels</alt></image>, and then select a number from the list.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp#navigator"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp#hyperlinks"/> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2994782bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideauto_numberingxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147407"><bookmark_value>numbering; lists, while typing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>bullet lists;creating while typing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lists;automatic numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>numbers;lists</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>automatic bullets/numbers; AutoCorrect function</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>bullets; using automatically</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs; automatic numbering</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW deleted "applying;"</comment><comment>mw deleted "automatic bullets" and changed "automatic numbering;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147407" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="auto_numbering"><link href="text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp" name="Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type">Creating Numbered or Bulleted Lists as You Type</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155525" role="paragraph">$[officename] can automatically apply numbering or bullets as you type.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154243" role="heading" level="2">To Enable Automatic Numbering and Bulleting</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152830" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> tab, and then select “Bulleted and numbered lists”.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152867" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect</emph>, and ensure that <emph>While Typing</emph> is selected.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2357860" role="tip">The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3152897" role="heading" level="2">To Create a Numbered or Bulleted List While You Type</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147773" role="listitem">Type 1., i., or I. to start a numbered list. Type * or - to start a bulleted list. You can also type a right parenthesis after the number instead of a period , for example, 1) or i).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147794" role="listitem">Enter a space, type your text, and then press Enter. The new paragraph automatically receives the next number or bullet.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147814" role="listitem">Press Enter again to finish the list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147287" role="note">You can start a numbered list with any number.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp#promotedemote"/> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154083" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/06050000.xhp" name="Format - Numbering/Bullets">Format - Bullets and Numbering</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d2dbd163 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideauto_offxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Turning Off AutoCorrect </title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154250"><bookmark_value>turning off automatic correction</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text;turning off automatic correction</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>uppercase;changing to lowercase</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>capital letters;changing to small letters after periods</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>quotation marks;changing automatically</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>words;automatic replacement on/off</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>lines;automatic drawing on/off</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>underlining;quick</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>borders; automatic drawing on/off</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>automatic changes on/off</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>changes;automatic</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>AutoCorrect function;turning off</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154250" role="paragraph" localize="false"/> + <h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147812"><variable id="auto_off"><link href="text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp" name="Turning Off AutoFormat and AutoCorrect">Turning Off AutoCorrect</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147833" role="paragraph">By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. </paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1081B" role="listitem">To quickly undo an automatic correction or completion, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Z. </paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10846" role="listitem">To turn off most AutoCorrect features, remove the check mark from the menu <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147251">To Remove a Word from the AutoCorrect List</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" localize="false" id="par_id3147274" role="listitem"><embedvar href="text/shared/00/00000406.xhp#autokorr"/></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145596" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Replace</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145620" role="listitem">In the <emph>AutoCorrect</emph> list, select the word pair that you want to remove.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145645" role="listitem">Click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145668">To Stop Replacing Quotation Marks</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" localize="false" id="par_id3151196" role="listitem"><embedvar href="text/shared/00/00000406.xhp#autokorr"/></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151220" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Localized Options</emph> tab</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151245" role="listitem">Clear the "Replace" check box(es).</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155076">To Stop Capitalizing the First Letter of a Sentence</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" localize="false" id="par_id3155099" role="listitem"><embedvar href="text/shared/00/00000406.xhp#autokorr"/></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155123" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155148" role="listitem">Clear the "Capitalize first letter of every sentence" check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155401">To Stop Drawing a Line When You Type Three Identical Characters</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155415" role="paragraph">$[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ #</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" localize="false" id="par_id3155439" role="listitem"><embedvar href="text/shared/00/00000406.xhp#autokorr"/></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155463" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Options</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155488" role="listitem">Clear the "Apply border" check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp#autotext"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp#line_intext"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp#number_date_conv"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48ceed5fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideauto_spellcheckxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Automatically Check Spelling</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154265"><bookmark_value>spellcheck;Automatic Spell Checking on/off</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>automatic spellcheck</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>checking spelling;while typing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>words;disabling spellcheck</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW deleted "text;"</comment> +<section id="autospellcheckHead"> + <h1 id="hd_id3154265"><variable id="auto_spellcheck"><link href="text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp" name="Automatically Check Spelling">Automatic Check Spelling</link></variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154664" role="paragraph">%PRODUCTNAME can automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelled words with a red wavy line.</paragraph> +</section> +<h2 id="hd_id3154678">To Check Spelling Automatically While You Type</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155531" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Tools - Automatic Spell Checking</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155569" role="listitem">Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the <emph>AutoCorrect </emph>submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147759" role="paragraph">If you choose a word from the <item type="menuitem">AutoCorrect</item> submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Replace</item> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147819" role="paragraph">You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing <emph>Add</emph>.</paragraph> + <h2 id="hd_id3147220">To Exclude Words From the Spellcheck</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147263" role="listitem">Select the words that you want to exclude.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147282" role="listitem">Click the Language control on the Status bar to open a menu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145602" role="listitem">Choose "None (Do not check spelling)".</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145648" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp" name="Creating a new dictionary.">Creating a new dictionary.</link></paragraph> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp#autocorr_except"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdc39d041 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideautocorr_exceptxml" indexer="exclude"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3152887"><bookmark_value>AutoCorrect function; adding exceptions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>exceptions; AutoCorrect function</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>abbreviations</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>capital letters;avoiding after specific abbreviations</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW added "capital letters;..."</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3152887" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="autocorr_except"><link href="text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp" name="Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List">Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154254" role="paragraph">You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. </paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155576" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Exceptions</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147762" role="listitem">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147786" role="listitem">Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the <emph>Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) </emph>box and click <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147812" role="listitem">Type the word in the <emph>Words with TWo INitial CApitals </emph>box and click <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3144875" role="tip">To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Z. This also adds the word or abbreviation that you typed to the AutoCorrect exceptions list.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp#auto_spellcheck"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..352daf5be --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideautotextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using AutoText</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155521"> + <bookmark_value>AutoText</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>networks and AutoText directories</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lists;AutoText shortcuts</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>printing;AutoText shortcuts</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;text blocks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text blocks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>blocks of text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="hid/modules/swriter/ui/insertautotextdialog/@@nowidget@@" id="bm_@@nowidget@@" localize="false"/> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="hid/modules/swriter/ui/insertautotextdialog/InsertAutoTextDialog" id="bm_id3148685" localize="false"/> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155521" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="autotext"><link href="text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp" name="Using AutoText">Using AutoText</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3150534" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">In $[officename] Writer, you can store text - also containing graphics, tables, and fields - as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert the text later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155539" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Create an AutoText Entry</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155560" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155581" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoText</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147761" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the category where you want to store the AutoText.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147779" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name that is longer than four characters. This allows you to use the <emph>Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing</emph> AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147807" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>AutoText</emph> button, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10732" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Close</emph> button.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147282" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert an AutoText Entry</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145597" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145615" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Tools - AutoText"><emph>Tools - AutoText</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145644" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3145668" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">AutoText</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> bar, and then choose an AutoText entry.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155090" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">To quickly enter a %PRODUCTNAME Math formula, type <item type="literal">fn</item>, and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type <item type="literal">dt</item>, and then press F3.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155115" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Print a List of AutoText Entries</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155136" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155160" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Macro from</emph> tree control, select Application Macros - Gimmicks - AutoText.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151277" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select "Main" in the <emph>Existing macros in: AutoText</emph> list and then click <emph>Run</emph>. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151304" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3151327" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Using AutoText in Network Installations</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3151355" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3151370" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3151390" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The paths for the AutoText directories can be edited in the configuration.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154960" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<paragraph id="par_id3154995" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp" name="Tools - AutoText">Tools - AutoText</link></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155012" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/01/06040600.xhp" name="Word Completion">Word Completion</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8b6b5675 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidebackgroundxhp" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/background.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149346"><bookmark_value>backgrounds;text objects</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>words;backgrounds</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>paragraphs; backgrounds</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>text;backgrounds</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>tables; backgrounds</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>cells; backgrounds</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>backgrounds;selecting</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW transferred 4 index entries from shared/guide/background.xhp and added 3 new entries</comment> +<h1 id="hd_id3149346"><variable id="background"><link href="text/swriter/guide/background.xhp" name="Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics">Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics</link> +</variable></h1><comment>MW built this file from splitting shared/guide/background.xhp</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7355265" role="paragraph">You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename] Writer.</paragraph> + <h2 id="hd_id3147653">To Apply a Background To Text Characters</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150669" role="listitem">Select the characters.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155390" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Format - Character</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153665" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Highlighting</emph> tab, select the background color.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 id="hd_id3153541">To Apply a Background To a Paragraph</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145119" role="listitem">Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3158430" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Format - Paragraph</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151245" role="listitem">On the <emph>Area</emph> tab page, select the background color or a background graphic.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <tip id="par_id0104201010554939">To select an object in the background, hold down the <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> key and click the object. Alternatively, use the Navigator to select the object.</tip> + <h2 id="hd_id3149294">To Apply a Background To All or Part of a Table</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154346" role="listitem">Place the cursor in the table in your text document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148664" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Table - Properties</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154938" role="listitem">On the <emph>Background</emph> tab page, select the background color or a background graphic.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156280" role="listitem">In the <emph>For</emph> box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <tip id="hd_id3151041">You may also use an icon to apply a background to table parts.</tip> + <tip id="par_id3150767">To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and use the <emph>Table Cell Background Color</emph> button dropdown on the <emph>Table</emph> toolbar.</tip> + <tip id="par_id3147084">To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph and then use the <emph>Background Color</emph> dropdown button on the <emph>Formatting</emph> toolbar.</tip> + <section id="relatedtopics"> +<switch select="appl"> +<case select="IMPRESS"><embed href="text/simpress/guide/background.xhp#background"/> +</case> +</switch> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10A56" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/02/02160000.xhp">Character Highlighting Color icon</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156180" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/05210100.xhp" name="Background tab page">Background tab page</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4922025" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/guide/background.xhp">Watermarks</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id478530" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp">Page Backgrounds as Page Styles</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d536fa3c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- +* This file is part of the LibreOffice project. +* +* This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public +* License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this +* file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. +* +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideborder_characterxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Defining Borders for Characters</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3156136"> +<bookmark_value>characters;defining borders</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>borders; for characters</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>frames; around characters</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining;character borders</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3116136" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="border_character"><link href="text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp" name="Defining Borders for Characters">Defining Borders for Characters</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148413" role="warning">If two adjacent text ranges' all border properties are identical (same style, width, color, padding and shadow), then those two ranges will be considered to be part of the same border group and rendered within the same border in the document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3110503" role="heading" level="2">To Set a Predefined Border Style</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3118661" role="listitem">Select the range of characters around which you want to add a border.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3118473" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Format - Character - Borders</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3110171" role="listitem">Select one of the default border styles in the <emph>Default</emph> area.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151046" role="listitem">Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152172" role="listitem">Select the distance between the border lines and the selected characters in the <emph>Padding</emph> area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3111023" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3142068" role="heading" level="2">To Set a Customized Border Style</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3118613" role="listitem">Select the range of characters around which you want to add a border.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3111663" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Format - Character - Borders</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3110541" role="listitem">In the <emph>User-defined</emph> area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3119149" role="listitem">Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3116282" role="listitem">Repeat the last two steps for every border edge.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3111041" role="listitem">Select the distance between the border lines and the selected characters in the <emph>Padding</emph> area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3141606" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp#border_paragraph"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp#border_page"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp#border_table"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp#border_object"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b0d8bcb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideborder_objectxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Defining Borders for Objects </title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3146957"><bookmark_value>objects; defining borders</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>borders; for objects</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>frames; around objects</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>charts;borders</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pictures;borders</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>OLE objects;borders</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining;object borders</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW deleted "adding;"</comment> +<h1 id="hd_id3146957"><variable id="border_object"><link href="text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp" name="Defining Borders for Objects">Defining Borders for Objects</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146797" role="paragraph">In Writer, you can define borders around OLE objects, plug-ins, diagrams/charts, graphics and frames. The name of the menu to be used depends on the object selected.</paragraph> + <h2 id="hd_id3145673">To Set a Predefined Border Style</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155388" role="listitem">Select the object for which you want to define a border.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149578" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Borders</emph> icon on the <emph>OLE Object</emph> toolbar or <emph>Frame</emph> toolbar to open the <emph>Borders</emph> window. </paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3159176" role="listitem">Click one of the predefined border styles. This replaces the current border style of the object with the selected style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 id="hd_id3152474">To Set a Customized Border Style</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153896" role="listitem">Select the object for which you want to define a border.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156344" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - (object name) – Borders</item>.<br/>Replace (object name) with the actual name of the object type you selected.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148797" role="listitem">In the <emph>User-defined</emph> area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152933" role="listitem">Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3125865" role="listitem">Repeat the last two steps for every border edge.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150447" role="listitem">Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the <emph>Padding</emph> area.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154908" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp#border_page"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp#border_paragraph"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp#border_table"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bdf0b96ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideborder_pagexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Defining Borders for Pages</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3156136"><bookmark_value>pages;defining borders</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>borders; for pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>frames; around pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining;page borders</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW deleted "adding;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156136" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="border_page"><link href="text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp" name="Defining Borders for Pages">Defining Borders for Pages</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148473" role="warning">In Writer, you define borders for <emph>page styles</emph>, not individual pages. All changes made to borders apply to all pages that use the same page style. Note that page style changes cannot be undone by the Undo function in $[officename].</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150503" role="heading" level="2">To Set a Predefined Border Style</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148491" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Format - Page - Borders</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150771" role="listitem">Select one of the default border styles in the <emph>Default</emph> area.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154046" role="listitem">Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152472" role="listitem">Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the <emph>Padding</emph> area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156023" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145068" role="heading" level="2">To Set a Customized Border Style</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148663" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Format - Page - Borders</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150541" role="listitem">In the <emph>User-defined</emph> area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3159149" role="listitem">Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the <emph>Line</emph> area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156282" role="listitem">Repeat the last two steps for every border edge.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151041" role="listitem">Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the <emph>Padding</emph> area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145606" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph> to apply the changes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp#border_paragraph"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp#border_character"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp#border_table"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp#border_object"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp#pagestyles"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..370f56243 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidebordersxhp" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">User Defined Borders in Text Documents </title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id6737876"><bookmark_value>borders;for text tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cells;borders in text tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining;table borders in Writer</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>frames;around text tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables;defining borders</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW changed "text tables;" to "tables;"</comment> +<h1 id="hd_id3614917"><variable id="borders"><link href="text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp">User Defined Borders in Text Documents</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1069368" role="paragraph">You can apply a variety of different cell borders to selected cells in a Writer table and to the whole table. Other objects in text documents can have user defined borders, too. For example, you can assign borders to page styles, to frames, and to inserted pictures or charts.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6527298" role="paragraph">Select the cell or a block of cells in a Writer table.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6129947" role="paragraph">Choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Properties</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8141117" role="paragraph">In the dialog, click the <emph>Borders</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6016418" role="paragraph">Choose the border options you want to apply and click OK.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5282448" role="paragraph">The options in the <emph>Line arrangement</emph> area can be used to apply multiple border styles.</paragraph> + <h2 id="hd_id3547166">Selection of cells</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1108432" role="paragraph">Depending on the selection of cells, the area looks different.</paragraph> + <table id="tbl_id4423352"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2422559" role="tablehead">Selection</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1053498" role="tablehead">Line arrangement area</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1076998" role="tablecontent">One cell selected in a table that has more than one cells, or cursor inside a table with no cell selected</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4240241" role="tablecontent"> +<image id="img_id1058992" src="media/helpimg/border_wr_1.png" width="1.4071in" height="1.7791in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id1058992">one cell border</alt> + </image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id162053" role="tablecontent">A one cell table, the cell is selected</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5021820" role="tablecontent"> +<image id="img_id7366557" src="media/helpimg/border_wr_2.png" width="1.4071in" height="1.7791in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id7366557">one selected cell border</alt> + </image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3549607" role="tablecontent">Cells in a column selected</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2544328" role="tablecontent"> +<image id="img_id2298654" src="media/helpimg/border_wr_3.png" width="1.4071in" height="1.7791in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id2298654">column selected border</alt> + </image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1636402" role="tablecontent">Cells in a row selected</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7450483" role="tablecontent"> +<image id="img_id9033783" src="media/helpimg/border_wr_4.png" width="1.4071in" height="1.7791in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id9033783">row selected border</alt> + </image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5741752" role="tablecontent">A whole table of 2x2 or more cells selected</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id570085" role="tablecontent"> +<image id="img_id4776757" src="media/helpimg/border_wr_5.png" width="1.4071in" height="1.7791in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id4776757">block selected border</alt> + </image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + </table> + + <h2 id="hd_id5044099">Default settings</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id626544" role="paragraph">Click one of the <emph>Default</emph> icons to set or reset multiple borders.</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id292062" role="listitem">The thin gray lines inside an icon show the borders that will be reset or cleared.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1361735" role="listitem">The dark lines inside an icon show the lines that will be set using the selected line style and color.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id82399" role="listitem">The thick gray lines inside an icon show the lines that will not be changed.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h3 id="hd_id7144993">Examples</h3> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5528427" role="paragraph">Select a block of about 8x8 cells, then choose <emph>Table - Properties - Borders</emph> tab.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4194158" role="paragraph"> +<image id="img_id8221076" src="media/helpimg/border_ca_5.png" width="1.2209in" height="0.2445in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id8221076">default icons for borders</alt> + </image></paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7253028" role="listitem">Click the left icon to clear all lines. This removes all outer borders and all inner lines.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9441206" role="listitem">Click the second icon from the left to set an outer border and to remove all other lines.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7276833" role="listitem">Click the rightmost icon to set an outer border. The inner lines are not changed.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5273293" role="paragraph">Now you can continue to see which lines the other icons will set or remove.</paragraph> + <h2 id="hd_id5110019">User defined settings</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1820734" role="paragraph">In the <emph>User defined</emph> area, you can click to set or remove individual lines. The preview shows lines in three different states. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7093111" role="paragraph">Repeatedly click an edge or a corner to switch through the three different states.</paragraph> + <table id="tbl_id5196996"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3673818" role="tablehead">Line types</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2593768" role="tablehead">Image</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2055421" role="tablehead">Meaning</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9836115" role="tablecontent">A black line</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6485793" role="tablecontent"> +<image id="img_id1237525" src="media/helpimg/border_wr_6.png" width="1.4071in" height="1.2555in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id1237525">solid line for border</alt> + </image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1454512" role="tablecontent">A black line sets the corresponding line of the selected cells. The line is shown as a dotted line when you choose the 0.05 pt line style. Double lines are shown when you select a double line style.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4618671" role="tablecontent">A gray line</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1239356" role="tablecontent"> +<image id="img_id2688680" src="media/helpimg/border_wr_7.png" width="1.4071in" height="1.2555in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id2688680">gray line for border</alt> + </image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9474166" role="tablecontent">A gray line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will not be changed. No line will be set or removed at this position.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1545457" role="tablecontent">A white line</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1681875" role="tablecontent"> +<image id="img_id7340617" src="media/helpimg/border_wr_8.png" width="1.4071in" height="1.2555in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id7340617">white line for border</alt> + </image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2316660" role="tablecontent">A white line is shown when the corresponding line of the selected cells will be removed.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + </table> + + <h3 id="hd_id5908688">Examples</h3> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5118564" role="paragraph">Select a single cell in a Writer table, then choose <emph>Table - Properties - Borders</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id244758" role="paragraph">Select a thick line style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7741325" role="paragraph">To set a lower border, click the lower edge repeatedly until you see a thick line.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id542313" role="paragraph"> +<image id="img_id4273506" src="media/helpimg/border_wr_6.png" width="1.4071in" height="1.2555in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id4273506">setting thick lower border</alt> + </image></paragraph> + <note id="par_id2210760">All cells in a Writer table have at least a left and a lower line by default. Most cells on the table perimeter have more lines applied by default. </note> + <warning id="par_id5400860">All lines that are shown in white in the preview will be removed from the cell.</warning> +<switch select="appl"> +<case select="CALC"><embed href="text/scalc/guide/borders.xhp#borders"/> +</case> +</switch> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/border_character.xhp#border_character"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp#border_page"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp#border_paragraph"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0352f5884 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidecalculatexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Calculating in Text Documents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149909"> + <bookmark_value>calculating; in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formulas; calculating in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>references;in Writer tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>=;in Writer tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables;starting cell with =</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "formula bar in text"</comment> + +<h1 id="hd_id3149909" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="calculate"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp" name="Calculating in Text Documents">Calculating in Text Documents</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3149949" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can insert a calculation directly into a text document or into a text table.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149972" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want to insert the calculation, and then press F2. If you are in a table cell, type an equals sign =.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155547" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the calculation that you want to insert, for example, <item type="literal">=10000/12</item>, and then press Enter.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3155565" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also click the <item type="menuitem">Formula</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">Formula Bar</item>, and then choose a function for your formula.</paragraph> +<note id="par_id8316904" xml-lang="en-US">To reference cells in a Writer text table, enclose the cell address or the cell range in angle brackets. For example, to reference cell A1 from another cell, enter =<A1> into the cell.</note> +<h2 id="hd_id971605353826552">Cell Entries that Start with Equal Sign (<keycode>=</keycode>)</h2> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id981605353389582">To make a table cell entry that starts with <keycode>=</keycode> sign, first enter a space, then the <keycode>=</keycode> sign, and then delete the space.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b9bc0a0a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_clipboardxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147692"><bookmark_value>pasting;results of formulas</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>clipboard;calculating in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formulas;pasting results in text documents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147692" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="calculate_clipboard"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp" name=" Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document"> Calculating and Pasting the Result of a Formula in a Text Document</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156366" role="paragraph">If your text already contains a formula, for example "12+24*2", $[officename] can calculate, and then paste the result of the formula in your document, without using the <emph>Formula Bar</emph>.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154250" role="listitem">Select the formula in the text. The formula can only contain numbers and operators and cannot contain spaces.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155496" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Tools - Calculate</emph>, or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Plus Sign (+).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5172582" role="listitem">Place the cursor where you want to insert the result of the formula, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Paste</item>, or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+V.<br/>The selected formula is replaced by the result.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9b3d77b11 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_intablexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Calculating Cell Totals in Tables</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147400"><bookmark_value>calculating;sums in text tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>totals in text tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables;calculating sums</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cells;calculating sums</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>table cells;calculating sums</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>sums of table cell series</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "text tables;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147400" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="calculate_intable"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp" name="Calculating Cell Totals in Tables">Calculating the Sum of a Series of Table Cells</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154243" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Table - Insert Table</emph>, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154203" role="listitem">Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154222" role="listitem">Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Sum</item> icon on the <item type="menuitem">Table Bar</item>.<br/>The + <item type="menuitem">Formula Bar</item> appears with the entry "=sum".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147775" role="listitem">Click in the first cell of the series you want to sum up, drag to the final cell, and then release.<br/>$[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150507" role="listitem">Press Enter, or click <emph>Apply</emph> in the Formula bar. <br/>The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150533" role="paragraph">If you enter a different number anywhere in the column, the sum is updated as soon as you click in the last column cell.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155533" role="paragraph">Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ca20390b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_intextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147406"> + <bookmark_value>formulas; complex formulas in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>calculating;formulas/mean values</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw reduced "calculating;" entries to one entry</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147406" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="calculate_intext"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp" name="Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents">Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145245" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3152901" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following:</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145078" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156382" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <item type="menuitem">Formula</item> icon, and choose "Mean" from the Statistical Functions list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149692" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the three numbers, separated by vertical slashes (|).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149481" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Press <emph>Enter</emph>. The result is inserted as a field into the document.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3149823" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp#calculate_intext2"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e63c3172 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_intext2xml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153899"><bookmark_value>calculating;in text tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables; performing calculations in</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW reduced "text tables;" to "tables;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153899" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="calculate_intext2"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp" name="Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table">Displaying the Result of a Table Calculation in a Different Table</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154250" role="paragraph">You can perform a calculation on cells in one table and display the result in a different table.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150508" role="listitem">Open a text document, insert a table with multiple columns and rows, and then insert another table consisting of one cell.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150528" role="listitem">Enter numbers into some of the cells of the large table.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155532" role="listitem">Place the cursor in the table with the single cell, and then press F2.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155551" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Formula Bar</item>, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, <item type="literal">=SUM</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155577" role="listitem">Click in a cell in the larger table that contains a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155598" role="listitem">Press <emph>Enter</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147776" role="note">If you want, you can format the table to behave as normal text. Insert the table into a frame, and then anchor the frame as a character. The frame remains anchored to the adjacent text when you insert or delete text.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74d08c1df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidecalculate_multitablexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Calculating Across Tables</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154248"><bookmark_value>calculating; across multiple text tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables;calculating across</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw changed "text tables;" to "tables;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154248" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="calculate_multitable"><link href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp" name="Calculating Across Tables">Calculating Across Tables</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147773" role="paragraph">You can perform calculations that span across more than one table in a text document.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147795" role="listitem">Open a text document, insert two tables, and type numbers in a few cells in both tables.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147815" role="listitem">Place your cursor in an empty cell in one of the tables.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147833" role="listitem">Press F2.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147228" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Formula Bar</item>, enter the function that you want to perform, for example, <item type="literal">=SUM</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147254" role="listitem">Click in a cell containing a number, press the plus sign (+), and then click in a different cell containing a number.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147274" role="listitem">Press <emph>Enter</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/main0214.xhp#releistename"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46047d24f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidecaptionsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using Captions </title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147691"> + <bookmark_value>inserting; captions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>captions; inserting and editing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;captions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>objects; captioning</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables; labeling</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>charts; labeling</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>frames; labeling</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>draw objects; inserting captions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>legends, see also captions</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "adding;"</comment> +<paragraph id="par_id3147691" role="paragraph" localize="false" xml-lang="en-US"/> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150537" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="captions"><link href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp" name="Using Captions">Using Captions</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153156" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">In text documents, you can add continuously numbered captions to graphics, tables, frames, and drawing objects.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153172" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can edit the text and the number ranges for different types of captions.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153186" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">When you add a caption to a picture or to an object, the object and the caption text are placed together in a new frame. When you add a caption to a table, the caption text is inserted as a paragraph next to the table. When you add a caption to a frame, the caption text is added to the text inside the frame, either before or after the existing text.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_idN10713" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">To move both the object and the caption, drag the frame that contains these items. To update the caption numbering after you move the frame, press F9.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="hd_id3155541" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To define a caption proceed as follows:</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155567" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the item that you want to add a caption to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155586" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Caption</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147765" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the options that you want, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>. If you want, you can also enter different text in the <item type="menuitem">Category</item> box, for example <item type="literal">Figure</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3147254" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">You can edit caption text directly in the document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147271" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145671" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption</emph>.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp#captions_numbers"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b39002211 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidecaptions_numbersxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147684"><bookmark_value>captions; adding chapter numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>objects; captioning automatically</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>numbering; captions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>automatic numbering;of objects</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>chapter numbers in captions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;chapter numbers in captions</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147684"><variable id="captions_numbers"><link href="text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp" name="Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions">Adding Chapter Numbers to Captions</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147395" role="paragraph">You can include chapter numbers in captions.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147408" role="paragraph">Ensure that the text in your document is organized by chapters, and that the chapter titles and, if you want, the section titles, use one of the predefined heading paragraph styles. You must also assign a numbering option to the heading paragraph styles.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154249" role="listitem">Select the item that you want to add a caption to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150503" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Insert - Caption</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150527" role="listitem">Select a caption title from the <menuitem>Category</menuitem> box, and select a numbering scheme in the <menuitem>Numbering</menuitem> box. <br/>You also can enter a caption text in this dialog. If you want, enter text in the <menuitem>Caption</menuitem> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153166" role="listitem">Click <emph>Options</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153190" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Level</item> box, select the number of heading levels to include in the chapter number.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155553" role="listitem">Type the character that you want to separate the chapter number(s) from the caption number in the <item type="menuitem">Separator</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155586" role="listitem">In the <emph>Caption</emph> dialog, click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147226" role="tip">$[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption</emph>.</paragraph> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145567" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp" name="Caption dialog">AutoCaption dialog</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145574" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp" name="Chapter numbering">Chapter numbering</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14509d0f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidechange_headerxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3146875"> + <bookmark_value>headers; inserting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footers; inserting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>page styles; changing from selection</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>new page styles from selection</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "creating;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3146875" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="change_header"><link href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp" name="Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page">Creating a Page Style Based on the Current Page</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153584" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can design a page layout and then create a page style based on it.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154245" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For example, you can create a page style that displays a particular header, and another page style that displays a different header.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150503" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Open a new text document, choose <emph>View - Styles</emph>, and then click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150532" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph> Styles actions</emph> icon and select <emph>New Style from Selection</emph> from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153153" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the page in the <item type="menuitem">Style name</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153184" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Double-click the name in the list to apply the style to the current page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155541" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Header and Footer - Header</emph>, and choose the new page style from the list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155572" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the text that you want in the header. Position the cursor into the main text area outside of the header.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155592" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <menuitem>Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147771" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> area, select <item type="menuitem">Page break</item> and then select “Default Page Style” from the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147810" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Repeat steps 2-6 to create a second custom page style with a different header.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f43c2e63a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidechapter_numberingxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Chapter Numbering</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147682"> + <bookmark_value>outlines;numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>chapters;numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;heading numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>chapter numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>headings; numbering/paragraph styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>numbering;headings</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..." and made "outline numbering" a two level entry</comment> + +<h1 id="hd_id3147682" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="chapter_numbering"><link href="text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp" name="Chapter Numbering">Chapter Numbering</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3155605" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the chapter hierarchy.</paragraph> + +<h2 id="hd_id3155626" xml-lang="en-US">To Add Automatic Numbering to a Heading Style</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154255" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <menuitem>Tools - Chapter Numbering</menuitem>, and then click the <menuitem>Numbering</menuitem> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155891" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <menuitem>Paragraph style</menuitem> box, select the heading style that you want to add chapter numbers to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150513" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <menuitem>Number</menuitem> box, select the numbering scheme that you want to use, and then click <menuitem>OK</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h2 id="par_idN107CE" xml-lang="en-US">To Remove Automatic Chapter Numbering From a Heading Paragraph</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN107D5" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click at the beginning of the text in the heading paragraph, after the number.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN107D9" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Press the <keycode>Backspace</keycode> key to delete the number.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<note id="par_id441614161571912">Press <keycode>Shift+Backspace</keycode> with the cursor at the beginning of the heading to return the number.</note> +<h2 id="hd_id3155552" xml-lang="en-US">To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Heading</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155571" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Chapter Numbering</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147782" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the <item type="menuitem">Level</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147758" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the custom style in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147808" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp#arrange_chapters"/> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a064b4ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideconditional_textxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Conditional Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155619"> + <bookmark_value>matching conditional text in fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>if-then queries as fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>conditional text; setting up</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; conditional text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining;conditions</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155619" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="conditional_text"><link href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp" name="Conditional Text">Conditional Text</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155879" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155895" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153175" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Define a Conditional Variable</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153185" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155566" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Field - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Variables</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147759" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Set variable" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147784" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the variable in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box, for example <item type="literal">Reminder</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147810" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Text" in the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id7748344" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter <item type="literal">1</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> box, and then click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.<br/>The Format list now displays a "General" format.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145645" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Define a Condition and the Conditional Text</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145659" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151193" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151212" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Field - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151250" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Conditional text" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155936" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type <item type="literal">Reminder EQ "3"</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3155969" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">The quotation marks enclosing the "3" indicate that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="5"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150446" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the <emph>Then</emph> box. There is almost no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. You can paste a paragraph into this box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150473" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155073" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Display the Conditional Text</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155086" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155110" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155136" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Replace the number in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> box with 3, and then click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155168" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If the field does not automatically update, press F9.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp#conditional_text2"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp#defining_conditions"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3145714" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp" name="List of conditional operators">List of conditional operators</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3618e4059 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideconditional_text2xml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Conditional Text for Page Counts</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153108"> + <bookmark_value>page counts</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>conditional text;page counts</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153108" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="conditional_text2"><link href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp" name="Conditional Text for Page Counts">Conditional Text for Page Counts</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3156228" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156257" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150513" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Field - Page Count</item>, and then enter a space.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150537" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Field - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153166" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Conditional text" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145256" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type <item type="literal">Page > 1</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145280" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type <item type="literal">Pages</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Then</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145305" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type <item type="literal">Page</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Else</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155535" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp#defining_conditions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df71cac2d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidedelete_from_dictxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147688"> + <bookmark_value>user-defined dictionaries; removing words from</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>custom dictionaries; removing words from</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;words in user-defined dictionaries</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;..."</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147688" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="delete_from_dict"><link href="text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp" name="Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary">Removing Words From a User-Defined Dictionary</link></variable></paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153417" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - Language Settings - Writing Aids</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151391" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the <item type="menuitem">User-defined</item> list, and then click <item type="menuitem">Edit</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the word that you want to delete in the <emph>Word</emph> list, and then click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d99a25baf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidedragdroptextxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Moving and Copying Text in Documents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155919"><bookmark_value>sections;moving and copying</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>moving; text sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>copying; text sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pasting;cut/copied text sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>mouse;moving and copying text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "text sections;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155919" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="dragdroptext"><link href="text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp" name="Moving and Copying Text in Documents">Moving and Copying Text in Documents</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152994" role="listitem">Select the text that you want to move or copy.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155606" role="listitem">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154236" role="listitem">To move the selected text, drag the text to a different location in the document and release. While you drag, the mouse pointer changes to include a gray box.<br/> +<image id="img_id3153148" src="media/helpimg/movedata.png" width="0.3335in" height="0.3335in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3153148">Mouse cursor moving data</alt> + </image></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154257" role="listitem">To copy the selected text, hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> while you drag. The mouse pointer changes to include a plus sign (+).<br/> +<image id="img_id3152868" src="media/helpimg/copydata.png" width="0.3335in" height="0.3335in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3152868">Mouse cursor copying data</alt> + </image></paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp#dragdrop"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp#dragdrop_graphic"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp#dragdrop_table"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp#dragdrop_fromgallery"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp#dragdrop_gallery"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30523652d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideeven_odd_sdwxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153407"> + <bookmark_value>page styles; left and right pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>blank pages with alternating page styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>empty page with alternating page styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages; left and right pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting; even/odd pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>title pages; page styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>First Page page style</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>Left Page page style</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>right pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>even/odd pages;formatting</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW made "empty pages;..." and "blank pages;.." to one level entries.</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153407" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="even_odd_sdw"><link href="text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp" name="Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages">Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages</link></variable></paragraph> + +<table id="tbl_id3152897"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3154265" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"> <image id="img_id3155876" src="cmd/sc_designerdialog.png" width="0.473cm" height="0.473cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3155876">Icon</alt></image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147126" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph> at the bottom of the workplace.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id8194219" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Set Up Alternating Page Styles</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150526" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">View - Styles</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153153" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153179" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145267" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select "Right Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145299" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155529" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select "Left Page" in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155561" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Styles window.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3155588" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To add a header to one of the page styles, choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header and Footer - Header</item>, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147772" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header and Footer - Footer</item>, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147254" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">If you do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id888698" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Suppress the Printout of Empty Pages</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3394573" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id7594225" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id8147221" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Remove the check mark from <emph>Print automatically inserted blank pages</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp#pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3145596" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp" name="Insert Break dialog">Insert Break dialog</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..544c8a474 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidefield_convertxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Converting a Field into Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154079"><bookmark_value>fields; converting into text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>converting;fields, into text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>replacing;fields, by text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>changing;fields, into text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154079" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="field_convert"><link href="text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp" name="Converting a Field into Text">Converting a Field into Text</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149281" role="paragraph">You can change a field to regular text, so that it is no longer updated. After you change a field to text, you cannot change the text back into a field.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155608" role="listitem">Select the field and choose <emph>Edit - Cut</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154238" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Edit - Paste Special</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154262" role="listitem">Click "Unformatted text" in the + <item type="menuitem">Selection</item> list, and then click + <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3157551" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/02070000.xhp" name="Paste Special">Paste Special</link></paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca839452c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidefieldsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">About Fields</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145576"><bookmark_value>fields;updating/viewing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>updating;fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>Help tips;fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>properties;fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>disabling;field highlighting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>changing;field shadings</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>viewing;fields</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw changed "fields;..."</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145576" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="fields"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp" name="About Fields">About Fields</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154246" role="paragraph">Fields are used for data that changes in a document, such as the current date or the total number of pages in a document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154262" role="heading" level="2">Viewing Fields</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150509" role="paragraph">Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp" name="View - Field Names"><emph>View - Field Names</emph></link>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150536" role="paragraph">To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose <emph>View - Field Shadings</emph>. To permanently disable this feature, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - $[officename] - Application Colors</emph>, and clear the check box in front of <emph>Field shadings</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152885" role="paragraph">To change the color of field shadings, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - </emph><link href="text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp" name="$[officename] - Application Colors"><item type="menuitem">$[officename] - Application Colors</item></link>, locate the <item type="menuitem">Field shadings</item> option, and then select a different color in the <item type="menuitem">Color setting</item> box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153166" role="heading" level="2">Field Properties</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153180" role="paragraph">Most field types in a document, including database fields, store and display variable values.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155533" role="paragraph">The following field types execute an action when you click the field:</paragraph> + <table id="tbl_id3155548"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155582" role="tablehead">Field Type</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147760" role="tablehead">Property</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147789" role="tablecontent">Placeholder</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147812" role="tablecontent">Opens a dialog to insert the object corresponding to the placeholder, except for text placeholders. For text placeholders, click on the placeholder and type over it.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147216" role="tablecontent">Insert Reference</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147239" role="tablecontent">Moves the mouse pointer to the reference.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147267" role="tablecontent">Run macro</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147290" role="tablecontent">Runs a macro.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145614" role="tablecontent">Input Field</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145637" role="tablecontent">Opens a dialog to edit the contents of the field.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + </table> + + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155937" role="heading" level="2">Updating Fields</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155963" role="paragraph">To update all of the fields in a document, press F9, or choose <emph>Edit - Select All</emph>, and then press F9.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155984" role="paragraph">To update a field that was inserted from a database, select the field, and then press F9.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id271519643331154" role="note">Placeholders are not updated.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp#fields_enter"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp#fields_date"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp#conditional_text2"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp#pagenumbers"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..798e32e51 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidefields_datexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id5111545"> + <bookmark_value>inserting;date fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>dates;inserting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>date fields;fixed/variable</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>fixed dates</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>variable dates</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155165" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="fields_date"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp" name="Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field">Inserting a Fixed or Variable Date Field</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154491" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can insert the current date as a field that updates each time you open the document, or as a field that does not update.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147679" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Field - More Fields</emph> and click the <emph>Document</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153415" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click “Date” in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list and do one of the following:</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3155602" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To insert the date as a field that updates each time you open the document, click ”Date” in the <item type="menuitem">Select</item> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3154241" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To insert the date as a field that does not update, click “Date (fixed)” in the <item type="menuitem">Select</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp#fields_enter"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2215d06b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidefields_enterxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Adding Input Fields</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155916"> + <bookmark_value>text; input fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>fields; input fields in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>input fields in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;input fields</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW deleted "adding;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155916" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="fields_enter"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp" name="Adding Input Fields">Adding Input Fields</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153409" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">An input field is a variable that you can click in a document to open a dialog where you can edit the variable.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145776" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Field - More Fields</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Functions</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155620" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click “Input field”in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154257" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and type the text for the variable.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155888" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3150708" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">To quickly open all input fields in a document for editing, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline><keycode>+Shift+F9</keycode>.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bf74c016e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidefields_userdataxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153398"> + <bookmark_value>fields; user data</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>user data; querying</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>conditions; user data fields</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>hiding;text, from specific users</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; hiding from specific users, with conditions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>user variables in conditions/fields</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153398" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="fields_userdata"><link href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp" name="Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions">Querying User Data in Fields or Conditions</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154239" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can access and compare some user data from conditions or fields. For example, you can compare user data with the following operators:</paragraph> + +<table id="tbl_id3154255"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3155889" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">Operator</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147110" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">Meaning</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3150508" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">== or EQ</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3150531" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">equals</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3150725" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">!= or NEQ</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3150748" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">is not equal to</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + +<paragraph id="par_id3153167" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want, you can use a condition to hide specific text in your document from a specific user.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153190" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the text in the document that you want to hide.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145273" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145297" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Hide</item> area, select the <item type="menuitem">Hide</item> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155533" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>With Condition</emph> box, type <emph>user_lastname == "Doe"</emph>, where "Doe" is the last name of the user that you want to hide the text from.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155573" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then save the document.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3147760" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">The name of the hidden section can still be seen in the Navigator.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147777" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The following table is a list of the user variables that you can access when defining a condition or a field:</paragraph> + +<table id="tbl_id3147793"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147819" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">User variables</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147218" role="tablehead" xml-lang="en-US">Meaning</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147245" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_firstname</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147268" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">First name</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145592" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_lastname</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145615" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Last name</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145642" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_initials</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145666" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Initials</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151200" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_company</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151223" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Company</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3151250" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_street</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3152912" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Street</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3152940" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_country</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3152963" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Country</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3152990" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_zipcode</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145679" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Zip Code</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145706" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_city</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145729" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">City</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145756" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_title</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3145779" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Title</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3156284" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_position</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3156307" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Position</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3156334" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_tel_work</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3156357" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Business telephone number</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3156384" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_tel_home</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3149728" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Home telephone number</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3149756" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_fax</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3149778" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Fax number</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3149806" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_email</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147294" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Email address</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147321" role="code" xml-lang="en-US">user_state</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3147344" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">State</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp#hidden_text"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3147392" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp" name="List of operators">List of operators</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84c5b609c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidefindingxhp" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Finding and Replacing in Writer</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> + <section id="finding_text"> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id1163670"><bookmark_value>finding; text/text formats/styles/objects</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>replacing; text and text formats</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>styles;finding</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>searching, see also finding</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text formats; finding</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formats; finding and replacing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>searching; formats</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>objects;finding by Navigator</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>Asian languages;search options</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>3. mw added 2 index entries and changed "finding;"</comment><comment>2. mw copied 6 index entries from shared/01/02100300.xhp. Then made one entry of two "finding;" entries, one entry of two "replacing;" entries and one entry of two "formats;" entries</comment><comment>1. mw copied 5 entries from shared/01/02100000.xhp and then made one entry of two "finding;" entries.</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id8568681" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="finding"><link href="text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp">Finding and Replacing in Writer</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id611285" role="paragraph">In text documents you can find words, formatting, styles, and more. You can navigate from one result to the next, or you can highlight all results at once, then apply another format or replace the words by other text.</paragraph> + </section> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6226081" role="heading" level="2">The Find & Replace dialog</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6702780" role="paragraph">To find text within the whole document, open the Find & Replace dialog without any active text selection. If you want to search only a part of your document, first select that part of text, then open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3158970" role="heading" level="3">To Find Text</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6957304" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Edit - Find & Replace</emph> to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2164677" role="listitem">Enter the text to find in the <emph>Find</emph> text box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5684072" role="listitem">Either click <emph>Find Next</emph> or <emph>Find All</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4377269" role="paragraph">When you click <emph>Find Next</emph>, Writer will show you the next text that is equal to your entry. You can watch and edit the text, then click <emph>Find Next</emph> again to advance to the next found text. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1371807" role="paragraph">If you closed the dialog, you can press a key combination (Ctrl+Shift+F) to find the next text without opening the dialog. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id924100" role="paragraph">Alternatively, you can use the icons at the lower right of the document to navigate to the next text or to any other object in the document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9359416" role="paragraph">When you click <item type="menuitem">Find All</item>, Writer selects all text that is equal to your entry. Now you can for example set all found text to bold, or apply a character style to all at once.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id5891598" role="heading" level="3">To Replace Text</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1780755" role="note">Unlike searching text, replacing text cannot be restricted to the current selection only.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2467421" role="listitem">Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4286935" role="listitem">Enter the text to search in the <emph>Find</emph> text box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9959410" role="listitem">Enter the text to replace the found text in the <emph>Replace with</emph> text box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id24109" role="listitem">Either click <emph>Replace</emph> or <emph>Replace All</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id703451" role="paragraph">When you click <emph>Replace</emph>, Writer will search the whole document for the text in the <emph>Find</emph> box, starting at the current cursor position. When text is found, Writer highlights the text and waits for your response. Click <emph>Replace</emph> to replace the highlighted text in the document with the text in the <emph>Replace</emph> text box. Click <emph>Find Next</emph> to advance to the next found text without replacing the current selection.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7540818" role="paragraph">When you click <emph>Replace All</emph>, Writer replaces all text that matches your entry.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id9908444" role="heading" level="3">To Find Styles</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8413953" role="paragraph">You want to find all text in your document to which a certain Paragraph Style is assigned, for example the "Heading 2" style.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2696920" role="listitem">Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id896938" role="listitem">Click <emph>Other options</emph> to expand the dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9147007" role="listitem">Check <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Styles</item>.<br/>The <item type="menuitem">Find</item> text box now is a list box, where you can select any of the Paragraph Styles that are applied in the current document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id679342" role="listitem">Select the style to search for, then click <emph>Find Next</emph> or <emph>Find All</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3231299" role="heading" level="3">To Find Formats</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8087405" role="paragraph">You want to find all text in your document to which a certain direct character formatting is assigned. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3406170" role="note">Finding formats only finds direct character attributes, it does not find attributes applied as part of a style.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2448805" role="listitem">Choose Edit - Find & Replace to open the Find & Replace dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4542985" role="listitem">Click <emph>More Options</emph> to expand the dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4679403" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Format</emph> button.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <list type="ordered" startwith="5"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7783745" role="listitem">Click <emph>Find Next</emph> or <emph>Find All</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5597094" role="heading" level="3">More options</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9919431" role="paragraph">The similarity search can find text that is almost the same as your search text. You can set the number of characters that are allowed to differ.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8533280" role="paragraph">Check the <emph>Similarity search</emph> option and optionally click the <emph>Similarities</emph> button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.)</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4646748" role="tip">When you have enabled Asian language support under <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - Language Settings - Languages</emph>, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id2489394" role="heading" level="2">The Navigator</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9934385" role="paragraph">The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4159062" role="paragraph">Choose <emph>View - Navigator</emph> to open the Navigator window.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7421796" role="paragraph">Use the Navigator for inserting objects, links and references within the same document or from other open documents. See the <link href="text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp">Navigator</link> guide for more information.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6417432" role="paragraph">Click the icon with the blue circle at the bottom right part of your document to open the small <emph>Navigation</emph> window.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4639728" role="paragraph">Use the small Navigation window to quickly jump to the next object or find the next text in your document.</paragraph> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp#navigator"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp#search_regexp"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp#find_attributes"/> + <embed href="text/shared/01/02100001.xhp#02100001"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp#removing_line_breaks"/> + <embed href="text/scalc/guide/finding.xhp#finding"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31cfd6c25 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidefooter_nextpagexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145819"> + <bookmark_value>pages; continuation pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>next page number in footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>continuation pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>page numbers; continuation pages</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<h1 id="hd_id3145819" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="footer_nextpage"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footer_nextpage.xhp" name="Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages">Inserting Page Numbers of Continuation Pages</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3154242" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can easily insert the page number of the next page in a footer by using a field.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154256" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The page number is only displayed if the following page exists.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Header and Footer - Footer</emph> and select the page style that you want to add the footer to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147109" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place the cursor in the footer and choose <emph>Insert - Field - More Fields</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147134" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Fields</emph> dialog, click the <emph>Document</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150955" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click 'Page' in the <emph>Type</emph> list and 'Next page' in the <emph>Select</emph> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150517" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click a numbering scheme in the <menuitem>Format</menuitem> list.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3150537" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you select 'Text' in the <emph>Format</emph> list, only the text that you enter in the <emph>Value</emph> box is displayed in the field.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150727" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph> to insert the field with the page number.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp#footer_pagenumber"/> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d4ad56f9f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidefooter_pagenumberxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting Page Numbers in Footers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155624"><bookmark_value>footers; with page numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages; numbers and count of</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>page numbers; footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>numbering;pages</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155624" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="footer_pagenumber"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp" name="Inserting Page Numbers in Footers">Inserting Page Numbers in Footers</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8230842" role="paragraph">You can easily insert a page number field in the footer of your document. You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12"</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id7867366" role="heading" level="2">To Insert a Page Number</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150508" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Insert - Header and Footer - Footer</emph> and select the page style that you want to add the footer to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150534" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Insert - Field - Page Number</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153155" role="paragraph">If you want, you can align the page number field as you would text.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id2988677" role="heading" level="2">To Additionally Add a Page Count</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155532" role="listitem">Click in front of the page number field, type <item type="literal">Page</item> and enter a space; click after the field, enter a space and then type <item type="literal">of</item> and enter another space.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155554" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Insert - Field - Page Count</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp#even_odd_sdw"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1994a5c79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidefootnote_usagexml" indexer="include"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145819"> + <bookmark_value>endnotes;inserting and editing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;footnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>organizing;footnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footnotes; inserting and editing</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<h1 id="hd_id3145819" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="footnote_usage"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp" name="Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes">Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3154258" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes and endnotes.</paragraph> + +<h2 id="hd_id3155881" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a Footnote or Endnote</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155903" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147120" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp" name="Insert - Footnote"><emph>Insert - Footnote and Endnote - Footnote or Endnote</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150937" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Numbering</item> area, select the format that you want to use. If you select <item type="menuitem">Character</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Choose</item> button and select the character that you want to use for the footnote.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150508" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> area, select <item type="menuitem">Footnote</item> or <item type="menuitem">Endnote</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150704" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150729" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the note.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<table id="tbl_id3150745"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3148843" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"> <image id="img_id3148857" src="cmd/sc_insertfootnote.png" width="1cm" height="1cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3148857">Icon</alt></image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3153176" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also insert footnotes by clicking the <emph>Insert Footnote Directly</emph> icon on the <emph>Insert</emph> toolbar.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + +<table id="tab_id31607163776333"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id41607163776333"> +<image src="cmd/sc_insertendnote.png" id="img_id341607163776333" width="1cm" height="1cm"><alt id="alt_id511607163776333">Insert Endnote Icon</alt></image> + </paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id121607163776335" role="paragraph">You can insert endnotes directly by clicking the <menuitem>Insert Endnote</menuitem> icon on the <emph>Standard</emph> or <emph>Insert</emph> toolbar or choose <menuitem>Insert - Footnote and Endnote - Endnote</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + + +<h2 id="hd_id3155543" xml-lang="en-US">To Edit a Footnote or Endnote</h2> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150167" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155563" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text, or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline><keycode>+Shift+PageDown</keycode>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145029" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command+T +</caseinline><defaultinline>F11</defaultinline></switchinline> to open the Styles window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145062" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145081" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp" name="Edit - Footnote"><emph>Edit - Footnote/Endnote</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147776" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/06080000.xhp" name="Tools - Footnotes"><emph>Tools - Footnotes and Endnotes</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147813" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose <emph>Format - Page</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05040600.xhp" name="Footnote"><emph>Footnote</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147232" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<tip id="par_id781607164467521">Shortcut keys can be made to insert, edit, and navigate to footnotes and endnotes. Choose <menuitem>Tools - Customize - Keyboard</menuitem> tab and enter <input>note</input> in the Functions box to see possibilities.</tip> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp#footnote_with_line"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/01/05040700.xhp#fussendnotenh1"/> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id251603931682056"><link href="text/shared/01/06140200.xhp" name="makeshortcut">Making a Shortcut Key</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1796acad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidefootnote_with_linexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Spacing Between Footnotes</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147683"> + <bookmark_value>spacing; endnotes/footnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>endnotes; spacing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footnotes; spacing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>borders;for footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lines;footnotes/endnotes</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3147683" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="footnote_with_line"><link href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp" name="Spacing Between Footnotes">Spacing Between Footnotes</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145808" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to increase the spacing between footnote or endnote texts, you can add a top and bottom border to the corresponding paragraph style.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155603" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in a footnote or endnote.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155620" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>View - Styles</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154251" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click the Paragraph Style that you want to modify, for example, "Footnote", and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155884" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <link href="text/shared/01/05030500.xhp" name="Borders"><emph>Borders</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147110" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Default</item> area, click the <item type="menuitem">Set Top and Bottom Borders Only</item> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150931" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Line</item> area, click a line in the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150961" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select "White" in the <item type="menuitem">Color</item> box. If the background of the page is not white, select the color that best matches the background color.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150519" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Padding</emph> area, clear the <emph>Synchronize</emph> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150709" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter a value in the <item type="menuitem">Top</item> and <item type="menuitem">Bottom</item> boxes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150740" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp#footnote_usage"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3148846" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/01/05030500.xhp" name="Format - Paragraph - Borders">Format - Paragraph - Borders</link></paragraph> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..894d9ffaf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideform_letters_mainxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Creating a Form Letter</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3159257"><bookmark_value>serial letters</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>form letters</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>mail merge</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>letters; creating form letters</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>wizards;form letters</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw added "serial letters"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3159257" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="form_letters"><variable id="form_letters_main"><link href="text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp" name="Creating a Form Letter">Creating a Form Letter</link> +</variable> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150502" role="paragraph">To create a form letter, you need a text document that contains fields for address data, and an address database. Then you combine or merge the address data and the text document to either print the letters or send them by email.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0805200801132382" role="note">If the document is in HTML format, any embedded or linked images will not be sent with the email.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10653" role="paragraph">The <link href="text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp">Mail Merge Wizard</link> helps you to create form letters.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10664" role="heading" level="1">To create a form letter</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1066B" role="paragraph">Choose <emph>Tools - Mail Merge Wizard</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10672" role="paragraph">You see the Mail Merge Wizard dialog. The following is an example of one of many possible ways to navigate the wizard's pages:</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10676" role="paragraph">Select <emph>Start from a template</emph>, and click the <emph>Browse</emph> button.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10681" role="paragraph">You see the <emph>New</emph> dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10685" role="paragraph">Select <item type="literal">Business Correspondence</item> in the left list, and then <item type="literal">"Modern" business letter</item> in the right list. Click <emph>OK</emph> to close the Templates dialog, and click <emph>Next</emph> in the wizard.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2669759" role="paragraph">Select <emph>Letter</emph> and click <emph>Next</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106BD" role="paragraph">On the next step of the wizard, click the <emph>Select Address List</emph> button to check that you are using the correct address list. If you want to use an address block, select an address block type, match the data fields if necessary, and click <emph>Next</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106C5" role="paragraph">Next follows the <emph>Create a salutation</emph> step. Deselect the <emph>Insert personalized salutation</emph> box. Under <emph>General salutation</emph>, select the salutation that you want on top of all letters.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106C6" role="paragraph">If you want to place mail merge fields anywhere else in the document select the corresponding column in your address data source and then drag and drop the column header into the document where you would like the field to be. Be sure to select the entire column.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106D5" role="paragraph">Click <emph>Next</emph> and finally <emph>Finish</emph> to create the mail merge.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp#data_addressbook"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp#database_main"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a0a73d75 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideglobaldocxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Master Documents and Subdocuments</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145246"><bookmark_value>master documents;properties</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>subdocuments;properties</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>central documents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>subsidiary documents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>documents; master documents and subdocuments</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>styles;master documents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>Mw made "master documents" and "subdocuments" a two level entry, deleted "references;" and "bookmarks;" and added a new entry and shifted "Navigator;" and "indexes;" to the file globaldoc_howtos.xhp</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145246" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="globaldoc"><link href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp">Master Documents and Subdocuments</link> +</variable></paragraph><comment>MW: This file was split into globaldoc.xhp (concepts) and globaldoc_howtos.xhp (procedures)</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149806" role="paragraph">A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6537369" role="heading" level="2">Characteristics of Master Documents</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150096" role="paragraph">When you print a master document, the contents of all subdocuments, indexes, and any text that you entered are printed.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153400" role="paragraph">You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155854" role="paragraph">Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as new paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9033783" role="paragraph">When viewing the master document, styles that are already present in the master document take precedence over styles with the same name that are imported from subdocuments. </paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3419598" role="paragraph">Subdocuments never get changed by changes made to the master document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155180" role="note">When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link is created in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly in the master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id7904904" role="heading" level="2">Example of Using Styles</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5817743" role="paragraph">A master document master.odm consists of some text and links to the subdocuments sub1.odt and sub2.odt. In each subdocument a new paragraph style with the same name Style1 is defined and used, and the subdocuments are saved.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9169591" role="paragraph">When you save the master document, the styles from the subdocuments are imported into the master document. First, the new style Style1 from the sub1.odt is imported. Next, the new styles from sub2.odt will be imported, but as Style1 now already is present in the master document, this style from sub2.odt will not be imported. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1590014" role="paragraph">In the master document you now see the new style Style1 from the first subdocument. All Style1 paragraphs in the master document will be shown using the Style1 attributes from the first subdocument. However, the second subdocument by itself will not be changed. You see the Style1 paragraphs from the second subdocument with different attributes, depending whether you open the sub2.odt document by itself or as part of the master document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5878780" role="tip">To avoid confusion, use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. This happens automatically when you create the master document and its subdocuments from an existing document with headings, using the command <emph>File - Send - Create Master Document</emph>.</paragraph> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp#globaldoc_howtos"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154382" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/02110000.xhp" name="Navigator in master mode">Navigator in master mode</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cae87b8c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideglobaldoc_howtosxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145246"> + <bookmark_value>Navigator;master documents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>master documents;creating/editing/exporting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>subdocuments;creating/editing/removing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>removing;subdocuments</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>indexes; master documents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW created 4 new index entries. 2 index entries were taken from globaldoc.xhp.</comment><comment>MW made one index entry out of 2 "subdocuments;" entries</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145246" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="globaldoc_howtos"><link href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc_howtos.xhp">Working with Master Documents and Subdocuments</link></variable></paragraph><comment>MW: this is a new guide created from splitting globaldoc.xhp</comment> +<paragraph id="par_id1522873" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters. The master document can be seen as a container for individual <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153127" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a Master Document</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149634" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149956" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>File - New - Master Document</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149612" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Open an existing document and choose <emph>File - Send - Create Master Document</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="2"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149873" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a <item type="menuitem">Text</item> entry. Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that after having edited an existing style in the master document, you see the changed style when viewing the subdocuments.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145114" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Navigator</item> for master documents (should open automatically, else press F5 to open), click and hold the <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> icon, and do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156240" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose <menuitem>File</menuitem>, locate the file that you want to include, and then click <emph>Open</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145405" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To create a new subdocument, choose <emph>New Document</emph>, type a name for the file, and then click <emph>Save</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id8550981" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To insert some text between subdocuments, choose <emph>Text</emph>. Then type the text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.<comment>i81372</comment></paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="4"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153382" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>File - Save</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154242" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Edit a Master Document</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154255" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document.</paragraph> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155879" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To open a subdocument for editing, double-click the name of the subdocument in the Navigator.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155931" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To remove a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose <emph>Delete</emph>. The subdocument file is not deleted, only the entry in the Navigator is removed.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148677" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Text</emph>. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.<comment>i81372</comment></paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149982" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the <item type="menuitem">Move down</item> or <item type="menuitem">Move up</item> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153022" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add an index, such as a table of contents, right-click in the Navigator list, and then choose <emph>Insert - Index</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<table id="tbl_id3154206"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3148949" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"> <image id="img_id3148959" src="sw/res/sc20246.png" width="0.473cm" height="0.473cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3148959">Icon</alt></image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id3153632" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the <emph>Update</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + +<paragraph id="par_idN10C40" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">When you insert an object like a frame or a picture into a master document, do not anchor the object "to page". Instead, set the anchor "to paragraph" on the <emph>Format - (Object type) - Type</emph> tab page, and then set the object's position relative to "Entire Page" in the <emph>Horizontal</emph> and <emph>Vertical</emph> list boxes.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153656" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Start Each Subdocument on a New Page</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3152760" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153876" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the master document, choose <emph>View - Styles</emph>, and click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153907" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click "Heading 1" and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147124" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <item type="menuitem">Text Flow</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149770" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Breaks</item> area, select <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>, and then select “Page”in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150224" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select <emph>With Page Style</emph>, and select "Right page" in the box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145205" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145228" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Export a Master Document</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150315" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">File - Export</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148580" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Save as type</emph> list, select a text document file format and click <emph>Save</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id8371227" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">The subdocuments will be exported as sections. Use <item type="menuitem">Format - Sections</item> to unprotect and remove sections, if you prefer a plain text document without sections.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp#globaldoc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3154382" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/01/02110000.xhp" name="Navigator in master mode">Navigator in master mode</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef1b4791b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideheader_footerxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">About Headers and Footers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155863"> + <bookmark_value>headers;about</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footers;about</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>HTML documents; headers and footers</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<h1 id="hd_id3155863" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="header_footer"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp" name="About Headers and Footers">About Headers and Footers</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3154255" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert <link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Fields">Fields</link>, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3150511" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">The page style for the current page is displayed in the <emph>Status Bar</emph>.</paragraph> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155896" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add a header to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Header and Footer - Header</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147119" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add a footer to a page, choose <emph>Insert - Header and Footer - Footer</emph>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153726" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">You can also choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> or <item type="menuitem">Footer</item> tab, and then select <item type="menuitem">Header on</item> or <item type="menuitem">Footer on</item>. Clear the <item type="menuitem">Same content left/right</item> check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146876" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different <link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Page Styles">Page Styles</link>, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<h2 id="hd_id3150704" xml-lang="en-US">Headers and Footers in HTML Documents</h2> +<paragraph id="par_id3150717" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Web Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3153174" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Page Styles">Page Styles</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..385887ef9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideheader_pagestylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Defining Different Headers and Footers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155920"> + <bookmark_value>headers;defining for left and right pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footers;defining for left and right pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>page styles; changing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining; headers/footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>mirrored page layout</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155920" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="header_pagestyles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp" name="Defining Different Headers and Footers">Defining Different Headers and Footers</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154263" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as <emph>First page</emph>, <emph>Left page</emph> and <emph>Right page</emph>, or you can create a custom page style.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147105" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Page</item> tab, and in the <item type="menuitem">Layout settings</item> area, choose “Mirrored” in the <item type="menuitem">Page layout</item> box.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3150224" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150929" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Open a new text document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150946" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>View - Styles</emph> and click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon in the Styles sidebar deck.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150510" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150536" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153750" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <item type="menuitem">Header on</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146865" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Next Style</item> box, select "Left Page".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146889" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150714" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Styles</emph> window, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150748" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> dialog, click the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153172" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <item type="menuitem">Header on</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147061" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Next Style</item> box, select "Right Page".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147086" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145263" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145284" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7460d4145 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideheader_with_chapterxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155919"> + <bookmark_value>running titles in headers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>floating titles in headers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>headers; chapter information</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>chapter names in headers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>names; chapter names in headers</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<h1 id="hd_id3155919" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="header_with_chapter"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp" name="Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer">Inserting a Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3153414" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Before you can insert chapter information into a header or footer, you must first set the chapter numbering options for the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles.</paragraph> + +<h2 id="hd_id3154244" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a Paragraph Style for Chapter Titles</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155874" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <menuitem>Tools - Chapter Numbering.</menuitem></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155898" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> box, select the paragraph style that you want to use for chapter titles, for example, "Heading 1".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147124" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the numbering scheme for the chapter titles in the <menuitem>Number</menuitem> box, for example, "1,2,3...".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150219" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type "Chapter" followed by a space in the <item type="menuitem">Before</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150245" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter a space in the <item type="menuitem">After</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150949" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h2 id="hd_id3150505" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert the Chapter Name and Number in a Header or a Footer</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150527" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Apply the paragraph style that you defined for chapter titles to the chapter headings in your document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153729" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header and Footer - Header</item> or <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header and Footer - Footer</item>, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153762" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the header or footer.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146863" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Field - More Fields</item> and click the <item type="menuitem">Document</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="5"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153175" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Chapter" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list and "Chapter number and name" in the <item type="menuitem">Format</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147065" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3147095" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The header on every page that uses the current page style automatically displays the chapter name and number.</paragraph> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..797c227b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideheader_with_linexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Formatting Headers or Footers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154866"> + <bookmark_value>inserting;lines under headers/above footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lines; under headers/above footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>headers;formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>footers;formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>shadows;headers/footers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>borders;for headers/footers</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW changed "inserting;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154866" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="header_with_line"><link href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp" name="Formatting Headers or Footers">Formatting Headers or Footers</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154243" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can apply direct formatting to the text in a header or footer. You can also adjust the spacing of the text relative to the header or footer frame or apply a border to the header or footer.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155873" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Page</item> and select the <item type="menuitem">Header</item> or <item type="menuitem">Footer</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147109" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the spacing options that you want to use.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147128" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add a border or a shadow to the header or the footer, click <item type="menuitem">More</item>. The <item type="menuitem">Border/Background</item> dialog opens.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150520" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add a separator line between the header or the footer and the content of the page, click the bottom edge of the square in the <emph>Line arrangement</emph> area. Click a line style in the <emph>Style</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153742" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To adjust the spacing between the content of the header or footer and the line, clear the <emph>Synchronize</emph> box, and then enter a value in the<emph> Bottom</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e8bddbe45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidehidden_textxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Hiding Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3148856"><bookmark_value>text; hiding</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>sections;hiding</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs;hiding</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>hiding;text, with conditions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>variables;for hiding text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "comparisons;" and copied two entries to hidden_text_display.xhp and 2 entries to nonprintable_text.xhp</comment><comment>MW added "variables;"</comment> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3148856"><variable id="hidden_text"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp" name="Hiding Text">Hiding Text</link></variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150103" role="paragraph">You can use fields and sections to hide or display text in your document if a condition is met.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153409" role="paragraph">Before you can hide text, you must first create a variable to use in the condition for hiding the text.</paragraph> +<h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id5174108">To Create a Variable</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153131" role="listitem">Click in your document and choose <emph>Insert - Field - More Fields</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149640" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Variables </emph>tab and click "Set Variable" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149970" role="listitem">Click "General" in the <emph>Format </emph>list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149620" role="listitem">Type a name for the variable in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box, for example, <item type="literal">Hide</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149869" role="listitem">Enter a value for the variable in the <item type="menuitem">Value</item> box, for example, <item type="literal">1</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145108" role="listitem">To hide the variable in your document, select <emph>Invisible</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149585" role="listitem">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> +<h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156245">To Hide Text</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145391" role="listitem">Click in the document where you want to add the text.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145409" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Insert - Field - More Fields</emph> and click the <emph>Functions</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155325" role="listitem">Click "Hidden Text" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154404" role="listitem">Enter a statement in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter <item type="literal">Hide==1</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153371" role="listitem">Type the text that you want to hide in the <emph>Hidden text </emph>box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154233" role="listitem">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> +<h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154256">To Hide a Paragraph</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154853" role="listitem">Click in the paragraph where you want to add the text.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154872" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Insert - Field - More Fields</menuitem> and click the <emph>Functions</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155902" role="listitem">Click "Hidden Paragraph" in the <emph>Type </emph>list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155947" role="listitem">Enter a statement in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter <item type="literal">Hide==1</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149991" role="listitem">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> and <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <note xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3793450">You must enable this feature by removing the check mark <emph>Hidden Paragraphs</emph> in the dialog <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><menuitem>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</menuitem></caseinline><defaultinline><menuitem>Tools - Options</menuitem></defaultinline></switchinline> - <menuitem>%PRODUCTNAME Writer - View</menuitem>. When the check mark is set, you cannot hide any paragraph.</note> +<h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3148675">To Hide a Section</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148697" role="listitem">Select the text that you want to hide in your document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153019" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Insert - Section</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148950" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Hide</item> area, select <item type="menuitem">Hide</item>, and then enter an expression in the <item type="menuitem">Condition</item> box. For example, using the variable you previously defined, enter <item type="literal">Hide==1</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153636" role="listitem">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3846858" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp" name="Displaying Hidden Text">Displaying Hidden Text</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8148442" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp" name="Creating Non-printing Text">Creating Non-printing Text</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148603" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/04090000.xhp" name="Insert - Fields - Other">Insert - Field - More Fields</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147011" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp" name="Insert - Section">Insert - Section</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147029" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp" name="List of Operators">List of Operators</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..01244aa96 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidehidden_text_displayxhp" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Displaying Hidden Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3148856"><bookmark_value>hidden text; displaying</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>displaying;hidden text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW copied two entries from hidden_text.xhp</comment> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3148856"><variable id="hidden_text_display"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp" name="Displaying Hidden Text">Displaying Hidden Text</link> +</variable></h1><comment>MW created this guide from splitting hidden_text.xhp</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5659962" role="paragraph">If you have a text that was hidden by defining a condition with a variable, you have several options to display the hidden text. Do one of the following:</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152777" role="listitem">Check the <emph>Hidden Paragraphs</emph> box in the dialog <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><menuitem>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</menuitem></caseinline><defaultinline><menuitem>Tools - Options</menuitem></defaultinline></switchinline> - <menuitem>%PRODUCTNAME Writer - View</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153902" role="listitem">Double-click in front of the variable that you used to define the condition for hiding the text, and enter a different value for the variable.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147114" role="listitem">Double-click in front of the hidden text field or the hidden paragraph field, and change the condition statement.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1865901" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp" name="Hiding Text">Hiding Text</link></paragraph> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147029" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp" name="List of Operators">List of Operators</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4087575b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidehyperlinksxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155845"> + <bookmark_value>hyperlinks; inserting from Navigator</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting; hyperlinks from Navigator</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cross-references; inserting with Navigator</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>Navigator;inserting hyperlinks</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "adding;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155845" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="hyperlinks"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp" name="Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator">Inserting Hyperlinks With the Navigator</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155858" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can insert a cross-reference as a hyperlink in your document using the Navigator. You can even cross-reference items from other <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> documents. If you click the hyperlink when the document is opened in <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item>, you are taken to the cross-referenced item.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149833" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Open the document(s) containing the items you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148846" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the Standard bar, click the <emph>Navigator</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156108" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the arrow next to the <item type="menuitem">Drag Mode</item> icon, and ensure that <item type="menuitem">Insert as Hyperlink</item> is selected.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153396" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list at the bottom of the Navigator, select the document containing the item that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153416" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the Navigator list, click the plus sign next to the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153133" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3149635" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The name of the item is inserted in the document as an underlined hyperlink.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp#navigator"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp#arrange_chapters"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bda3fe52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidehyphen_preventxhp" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Preventing Hyphenation of Specific Words</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149695"><bookmark_value>hyphenation;preventing for specific words</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>words;wrapping/not wrapping in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>switching off;hyphenation for specific words</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149695"><variable id="hyphen_prevent"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp" name="Preventing Hyphenation of Specific Words">Preventing Hyphenation of Specific Words</link> +</variable></h1><comment>MW created this guide from splitting using_hyphen.xhp</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5640125" role="paragraph">If your text is <link href="text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp">automatically hyphenated</link> and certain hyphenated words look ugly, or if you want specific words never to be hyphenated you can switch off hyphenation for those words:</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153634" role="listitem">Choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - Language Settings - Writing Aids</emph> + </paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153658" role="listitem">Select a dictionary in the <emph>User-defined dictionary </emph>list, and then click <emph>Edit</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147125" role="listitem">If the list is empty, click <emph>New</emph> to create a dictionary.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150218" role="listitem">In the<emph> Word</emph> box, type the word you want to exclude from hyphenation, followed by an equal sign (=), for example, "pretentious=".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150247" role="listitem">Click <emph>New</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <tip xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147036">To quickly exclude a word from hyphenation, select the word, choose <emph>Format - Character</emph>, click the <emph>Font </emph>tab, and select "None" in the <emph>Language </emph>box.</tip> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0302200910262761" role="paragraph">Some words contain special characters that %PRODUCTNAME treats as a hyphen. If you do not want such words to be hyphenated, you can insert a special code that prevents hyphenation at the position where the special code is inserted. Proceed as follows:</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0302200910262837" role="listitem">Position the cursor at the place where no hyphenation should occur.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0302200910262867" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Insert - Formatting Mark - Word Joiner</menuitem>.</paragraph> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id501639661322712">The inserted formatting mark will be shown in gray. To remove it, simply place the cursor over the formatting mark and press the <keycode>Del</keycode> key.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp#using_hyphen"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154361" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp" name="Text Flow">Text Flow</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c996dde28 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideindentingxhp" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Indenting Paragraphs</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155869"><bookmark_value>formatting; indenting paragraphs</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>indents;in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs; indents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>hanging indents in paragraphs</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>right indents in paragraphs</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lines of text; indents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>changing;indents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw made indents a two level entry, changed "paragraphs;" and copied "changing;indents" from writer guide "ruler.xhp"</comment> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id129398"><variable id="indenting"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp">Indenting Paragraphs</link> +</variable></h1><comment>see i66307</comment> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9936216" role="paragraph">You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style.</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4013794" role="paragraph">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing</item> to change the indents for the current paragraph or for all selected paragraphs. You can also <link href="text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp" name="ruler">set indents using the ruler</link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1631824" role="paragraph">Right-click a paragraph and choose <menuitem>Paragraph - Edit Style - Indents & Spacing</menuitem> tab to change the indents for all paragraphs that have the same Paragraph Style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <tip xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7953123">You can also <link href="text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp" name="ruler">set indents using the ruler</link>. To display the ruler, choose <item type="menuitem">View - Ruler</item>.</tip> +<h2 id="hd_id361605222538173">Positioning indents</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7271645" role="paragraph">Indents are calculated with respect to the left and right page margins. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. </paragraph> +<note xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5589159">To change the measurement units, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><item type="menuitem">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</item></caseinline><defaultinline><item type="menuitem">Tools - Options</item></defaultinline></switchinline><item type="menuitem"> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General</item>, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. </note> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2136295" role="paragraph">The indents are different regarding the writing direction. For example, look at the <item type="menuitem">Before text </item>indent value in left-to-right languages. The left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In right-to-left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin.</paragraph> + <h2 id="hd_id671605222596649">Hanging indents</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4186223" role="paragraph">For a hanging indent, enter a positive value for <item type="menuitem">Before text</item> and a negative value for <item type="menuitem">First line</item>.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id811605224853050">The <emph>Hanging Indent</emph> icon is found in the Paragraph section of the Properties sidebar. Click on this icon to switch the values of <menuitem>Before text</menuitem> and <menuitem>First line</menuitem>. This enables you to toggle a paragraph between an indented first line and a hanging indent.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id151605225966778">To create a hanging indent: Enter a first line indent where you want the indent to start, then click the Hanging Indent icon to create the hanging indent.</paragraph> +<table id="tab_id191605223016307"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id331605223016307"> +<image src="cmd/lc_hangingindent.png" id="img_id121605223016307" width="1cm" height="1cm"><alt id="alt_id61605223016307">Hanging Indent Icon</alt></image></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id881605223016307" role="paragraph">Hanging Indent Icon</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id901605225508322">The <emph>Hanging Indent</emph> command can be added as a <link href="text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp" name="addbutton">button to a toolbar</link>, an <link href="text/shared/01/06140100.xhp" name="addmenuitem">item in a menu</link> or <link href="text/shared/01/06140300.xhp" name="modifymenu">context menu</link>, or a <link href="text/shared/01/06140200.xhp" name="makeshortcut">shortcut key</link>.</paragraph> +<section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp#ruler"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1491134" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/05030100.xhp">Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11db2b3be --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_deletexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155186"> + <bookmark_value>indexes; editing or deleting entries</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables of contents; editing or deleting entries</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;entries of indexes/tables of contents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;table/index entries</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155186" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="indices_delete"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp" name="Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries">Editing or Deleting Index and Table Entries</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155855" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Index entries are inserted as fields into your document. To view fields in your document, choose <item type="menuitem">View</item> and ensure that <item type="menuitem">Field Shadings</item> is selected.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155507" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place the cursor immediately in front of the index entry in your document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155526" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Edit - Reference - Index Entry...</emph>, and do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154238" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the entry, enter different text in the <emph>Entry</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154263" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To remove the entry, click <emph>Delete</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<paragraph id="par_id3155893" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To cycle through the index entries in your document, click the next or the previous arrows in the <link href="text/swriter/01/02160000.xhp" name="Edit Index Entry dialog"><emph>Edit Index Entry</emph> dialog</link>.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b19250d19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_editxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149695"><bookmark_value>indexes; editing/updating/deleting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables of contents; editing and deleting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>updating;indexes/tables of contents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;indexes/tables of contents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;indexes/tables of contents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149695" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="indices_edit"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp" name="Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents">Updating, Editing and Deleting Indexes and Tables of Contents</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155856" role="listitem">Place the cursor in the index or table of contents.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155871" role="listitem">If you cannot place your cursor in the index or table of contents, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><item type="menuitem">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</item></caseinline><defaultinline><item type="menuitem">Tools - Options</item></defaultinline></switchinline><item type="menuitem"> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</item>, and then select <item type="menuitem">Enable cursor</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Protected Areas</item> section.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154248" role="listitem">Right-click and choose an editing option from the menu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155872" role="paragraph">You can also make changes directly to an index or table of contents. Right-click in the index or table of contents, choose <emph>Edit Index or Table of Contents</emph>, click <emph>Type</emph> tab, and then clear the <emph>Protected against manual changes</emph> check box.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7841d0a72 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_enterxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149689"> + <bookmark_value>indexes; defining entries in</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables of contents; defining entries in</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>entries; defining in indexes/tables of contents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<h1 id="hd_id3149689"><variable id="indices_enter"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp" name="Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries">Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries</link></variable></h1> + +<h2 id="hd_id3155862">To Define Index Entries</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156380" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147409" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry</item>, and do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153417" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the <emph>Entry</emph> box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154258" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select <emph>Apply to all similar texts</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155889" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add the entries to a custom index, click the <emph>New User-defined Index</emph> icon, enter the name of the index, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<h2 id="hd_id3147119">To Define Table of Contents Entries</h2> +<paragraph id="par_id3147132" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents.</paragraph> + +<h3 id="hd_id3150230">To Use a Custom Paragraph Style as a Table of Contents Entry</h3> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150933" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Chapter Numbering</item> and click the <emph>Numbering</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150964" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the <emph>Paragraph Style</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150523" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Level</emph> list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153730" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. </paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#emptyentry"/> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb4f86377 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_formxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155855"><bookmark_value>indexes; formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing; index format</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables of contents; formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>entries; in tables of contents, as hyperlinks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables of contents; hyperlinks as entries</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>hyperlinks; in tables of contents and indexes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting;indexes and tables of contents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155855" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="indices_form"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp" name="Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents">Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154259" role="paragraph">You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the <emph>Insert Index</emph> dialog.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155888" role="heading" level="2">To Apply a Different Paragraph Style to an Index Level</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147110" role="listitem">Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose <emph>Edit Index or Table of Contents</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147135" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Styles </emph>tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150229" role="listitem">Click an index level in the <emph>Levels </emph>list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150934" role="listitem">Click the style that you want to apply in the <emph>Paragraph Style </emph>list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150960" role="listitem">Click the assign button <emph><</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150516" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3146878" role="heading" level="2">To Assign Hyperlinks to Entries in a Table of Contents</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3146890" role="paragraph">You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150712" role="listitem">Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose <emph>Edit Index or Table of Contents</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150738" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148399" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Level</item> list click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148424" role="listitem">In the <emph>Structure </emph>area, click in the box in front of <emph>E#</emph>, and then click <emph>Hyperlink</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153171" role="listitem">Click in the box behind the <emph>E</emph>, and then click <emph>Hyperlink</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147060" role="listitem">Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the <item type="menuitem">All</item> button to apply the formatting to all levels.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fe59a885 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_indexxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating Alphabetical Indexes</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"> + <bookmark_value>concordance files;indexes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>indexes; alphabetical indexes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>alphabetical indexes</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155911" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="indices_index"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp" name="Creating Alphabetical Indexes">Creating Alphabetical Indexes</link></variable></paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155884" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <emph>Type</emph> tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147114" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to use a concordance file, select <item type="menuitem">Concordance file</item> in the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> area, click the <item type="menuitem">File</item> button, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150223" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the <emph>Entries</emph> tab, and then select <emph>Alphabetical delimiter</emph>. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the <emph>Styles</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150946" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150502" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose <emph>Update Index or Table of Contents</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3152760" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp" name="Creating a concordance file">Creating a concordance file</link></paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..076aa1f87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_literaturexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Bibliography</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149687"> + <bookmark_value>indexes;creating bibliographies</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>databases;creating bibliographies</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>bibliographies</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>entries;bibliographies</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>storing bibliographic information</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149687" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="indices_literature"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp" name="Creating a Bibliography">Creating a Bibliography</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155864" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153402" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Storing Bibliographic Information</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153414" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154244" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Store Information in the Bibliography Database</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155872" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/02250000.xhp" name="Tools - Bibliography Database"><emph>Tools - Bibliography Database</emph></link></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155900" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Data - Record</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147123" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150219" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Close the <item type="menuitem">Bibliography Database</item> window.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150242" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Store Bibliographic Information in an Individual Document</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150945" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150964" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry"><emph>Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150525" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>From document content</emph> and click <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153738" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the bibliography entry in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153763" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the publication source for the record in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146873" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146897" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Insert Bibliography Entry</item> dialog, click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>, and then <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp#saving_note"/> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150741" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148402" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148421" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Bibliography Entry</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="3"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153231" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>From bibliography database</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147059" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the <item type="menuitem">Short name</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147085" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph> and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<paragraph id="par_id3156060" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/04120300.xhp" name="Bibliography Database">Bibliography Database</link></paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +<paragraph id="par_id6367076" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Some external tools exist that can interact with %PRODUCTNAME. One example is called <link href="http://bibus-biblio.sourceforge.net/wiki/index.php/Main_Page">Bibus</link>.</paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..096758bc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_multidocxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Indexes Covering Several Documents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153418"><bookmark_value>indexes;multiple documents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>multiple documents;indexes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>merging;indexes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>master documents;indexes</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW inserted "master documents;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153418" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="indices_multidoc"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp" name="Indexes Covering Several Documents">Indexes Covering Several Documents</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155872" role="paragraph">There are several ways to create an index that spans several documents:</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155895" role="listitem">Create an <link href="text/swriter/01/04120210.xhp" name="index in each individual document">index in each individual document</link>, copy and paste the indexes into a single document, and then edit them.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147118" role="listitem">Select each index, choose <link href="text/swriter/01/04020000.xhp" name="Insert - Section"><item type="menuitem">Insert - Section</item></link>, and then enter a name for the index. In a separate document, choose + <item type="menuitem">Insert - Section</item>, select <item type="menuitem">Link</item>, click the <item type="menuitem">Browse</item> button, and then locate and insert a named index section.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150230" role="listitem">Create a <link href="text/shared/01/01010001.xhp" name="master document">master document</link>, add as subdocuments the files that you want to include in the index, and then choose <emph>Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87d1775e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_tocxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating a Table of Contents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147104"> + <bookmark_value>tables of contents; creating and updating</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>updating; tables of contents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="hid/modules/swriter/ui/tocdialog/@@nowidget@@" id="bm_@@nowidget@@" localize="false"/> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="hid/modules/swriter/ui/tocdialog/TocDialog" id="bm_id3154749" localize="false"/> + +<h1 id="hd_id3147104"><variable id="indices_toc"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp" name="Creating a Table of Contents">Creating a Table of Contents</link></variable></h1> + +<section id="tomanual"> +<paragraph id="par_id3150942" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents.</paragraph> + +<h2 id="hd_id5876949">To Insert a Table of Contents</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150510" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150528" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp" name="Type"><emph>Type</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153746" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select "Table of Contents" in the <emph>Type</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146856" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select any options that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146872" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3146896" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the <menuitem>Additional Styles</menuitem> check box in the <menuitem>Create from</menuitem> area, and then click the <menuitem>Assign styles</menuitem> button next to the check box. In the <menuitem>Assign Styles</menuitem> dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the <menuitem>>></menuitem> or the <menuitem><<</menuitem> button to define the outline level for the paragraph style.</paragraph> +</section> +<section id="emptyentry"> +<tip id="par_id1001574720273772">%PRODUCTNAME creates the table of contents entries based on the outline level of the paragraph style and the paragraph contents. If the paragraph is empty, it will not be included in the table of contents. To force the empty paragraph to be listed in the table of contents, manually add a space or a non breaking space to the paragraph. Spaces added in the <emph>After</emph> text box of the Numbering tab in the Chapter Numbering dialog will not work for this purpose, since they are part of the paragraph numbering, not the paragraph contents.</tip> +</section> +<h2 id="hd_id3153148">To Update a Table of Contents</h2> +<paragraph id="par_id3153161" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153183" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click in the table of contents and choose <emph>Update Index or Table of Contents</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147066" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64236a4d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideindices_userdefxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">User-Defined Indexes</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154896"> + <bookmark_value>indexes; creating user-defined indexes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>user-defined indexes</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154896" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="indices_userdef"><link href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp" name="User-Defined Indexes">User-Defined Indexes</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155184" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155915" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a User-Defined Index</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155867" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153410" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Index Entry</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154248" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <item type="menuitem">New User-defined Index</item> button next to the <item type="menuitem">Index</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the index in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box and click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147114" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> to add the selected word(s) to the new index.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147139" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <item type="menuitem">Close</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3150231" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a User-Defined Index</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150933" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want to insert the index.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150952" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Table of Contents and Index - Table of Contents, Index or Bibliography</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150509" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="4"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146881" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select any options that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3146897" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3150720" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select <item type="menuitem">Additional styles</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Assign styles</item> button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the <item type="menuitem">>></item> or the <item type="menuitem"><<</item> button to define the chapter level for the paragraph style.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fc8411b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> + + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideinsert_beforetablexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Text Before a Table at the Top of Page</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +</history> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149688"><bookmark_value>tables;start/end of document</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>paragraphs;inserting before/after tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>inserting;paragraphs before/after tables</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3149688" xml-lang="en-US" level="1"><variable id="insert_beforetable"><link href="text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp" name="Inserting Text Before a Table at the Top of Page">Inserting Text Before a Table at the Top of Page</link> +</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155923" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to insert text before a table that is at the top of a page, click in the first cell of the table, in front of any contents of that cell, and then press <item type="keycode">Enter</item> or <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><item type="keycode">Option</item></caseinline><defaultinline><item type="keycode">Alt</item></defaultinline></switchinline><item type="keycode">+Enter</item>.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10612" xml-lang="en-US">To insert text after a table at the end of the document, go to the last cell of the table and press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><item type="keycode">Option</item></caseinline><defaultinline><item type="keycode">Alt</item></defaultinline></switchinline><item type="keycode">+Enter</item>.</paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f40136788 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> + + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideinsert_graphicxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Graphics</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +</history> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154922"><bookmark_value>text; inserting pictures in</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>images; inserting in text</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>inserting; pictures</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>pictures; inserting options</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "illustrations;"</comment> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154922" xml-lang="en-US" level="1"><variable id="insert_graphic"><link href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp" name="Inserting Graphics">Inserting Graphics</link> +</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3149695" xml-lang="en-US">There are several ways to insert a graphic object in a text document.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp#insert_graphic_dialog"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp#insert_graphic_gallery"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp#insert_graphic_scan"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp#insert_graphic_fromdraw"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp#insert_graphic_fromchart"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5778d23aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideinsert_graphic_dialogxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting a Graphic From a File</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154896"> +<bookmark_value>pictures; inserting by dialog</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>inserting; pictures, by dialog</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 id="hd_id3154896"><variable id="insert_graphic_dialog"><link href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp" name="Inserting a Graphic From a File">Inserting a Graphic From a File</link> +</variable></h1> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp#insertgraphicsequence"/> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153396" role="paragraph">By default, the inserted graphic is centered above the paragraph that you clicked in.</paragraph> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp#insert_graphic_gallery"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp#insert_graphic_scan"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp#insert_graphic_fromdraw"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp#insert_graphic_fromchart"/> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e4a19b57 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideinsert_graphic_fromchartxml" indexer="include" + status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3152999"><bookmark_value>charts;copying from Calc into Writer</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>copying; charts from $[officename] Calc</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text documents;inserting Calc charts</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3152999" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="insert_graphic_fromchart"><link href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp" name="Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document">Inserting a Calc Chart into a Text Document</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155890" role="paragraph">You can insert a copy of a chart that is not updated when you modify the chart data in the spreadsheet.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149054" role="listitem">Open the text document that you want to copy the chart to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155854" role="listitem">Open the spreadsheet containing the chart that you want to copy.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153396" role="listitem">In the spreadsheet, click the chart. Eight handles appear.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153414" role="listitem">Drag the chart from the spreadsheet to the text document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145102" role="paragraph">You can resize and move the chart in the text document as you would any object. To edit the chart data, double-click the chart.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp#insert_graphic_dialog"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp#insert_graphic_gallery"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp#insert_graphic_scan"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp#insert_graphic_fromdraw"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp#insert_graphic_drawit"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..faa7d2892 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> + + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideinsert_graphic_fromdrawxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Graphics From $[officename] Draw or Impress</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +</history> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155917"><bookmark_value>text; inserting pictures from Draw</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>pictures; inserting from Draw</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155917" xml-lang="en-US" level="1"><variable id="insert_graphic_fromdraw"><link href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp" name="Inserting Graphics From $[officename] Draw or Impress">Inserting Graphics From $[officename] Draw or Impress</link> +</variable></paragraph> +<list type="ordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153414" xml-lang="en-US">Open the document where you want to insert the object.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149640" xml-lang="en-US">Open the Draw or Impress document containing the object that you want to copy.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3145098" xml-lang="en-US">Hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline> and click and hold the object for a moment.<comment>see i70967</comment></paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156250" xml-lang="en-US">Drag to the document where you want to insert the object.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list><comment>ufi: paragraph removed because I cannot verify: id="par_id3152755" If a hyperlink is attached to the object in the original document, the hyperlink is inserted instead of the object.</comment><embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp#insert_graphic_dialog"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp#insert_graphic_gallery"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp#insert_graphic_scan"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp#insert_graphic_fromchart"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp#insert_graphic_drawit"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66a8f7130 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> + + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideinsert_graphic_galleryxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Graphics From the Gallery With Drag-and-Drop</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +</history> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145083"><bookmark_value>inserting; from Gallery into text</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>pictures; inserting from Gallery into text</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>replacing;objects from Gallery</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145083" xml-lang="en-US" level="1"><variable id="insert_graphic_gallery"><link href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp" name="Inserting Graphics From the Gallery With Drag-and-Drop">Inserting Graphics From the Gallery With Drag-and-Drop</link> +</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155907" xml-lang="en-US">You can drag-and-drop an object from the gallery into a text document, spreadsheet, drawing, or presentation.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155923" xml-lang="en-US">To replace a gallery object that you inserted in a document, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag a different gallery object onto the object.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp#insert_graphic_dialog"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp#insert_graphic_scan"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp#insert_graphic_fromdraw"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp#insert_graphic_fromchart"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp#insert_graphic_drawit"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..751d644f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideinsert_graphic_scanxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting a Scanned Image</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3156017"><bookmark_value>inserting;scanned images</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pictures; scanning</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>scanning pictures</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156017" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="insert_graphic_scan"><link href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp" name="Inserting a Scanned Image">Inserting a Scanned Image</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149692" role="paragraph">To insert a scanned image, the scanner must be connected to your system and the scanner software drivers must be installed.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155182" role="paragraph"><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="WIN">The scanner must support the TWAIN standard. +</caseinline></switchinline><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="UNIX">The scanner must support the SANE standard. +</caseinline></switchinline></paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155915" role="listitem">Click in the document where you want to insert the scanned image.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155864" role="listitem">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/04060000.xhp" name="Insert - Media - Scan"><emph>Insert - Media - Scan</emph></link>, and choose the scanning source from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153416" role="listitem">Follow the scanning instructions.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp#insert_graphic_dialog"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp#insert_graphic_gallery"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp#insert_graphic_fromdraw"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp#insert_graphic_fromchart"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp#insert_graphic_drawit"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d9010382 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideinsert_tab_innumberingxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Changing the List Level of a List Paragraph</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp</filename> +</topic> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145078"> +<bookmark_value>tab stops; inserting in lists</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>numbering; changing the level of</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>lists;changing levels</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>levels;changing chapter levels</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>bullet lists;changing levels</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>lowering chapter levels</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>rising chapter levels</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>changing;chapter levels</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>promote level;in lists</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>demote level;in lists</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<section id="promotedemote"> +<h1 id="hd_id3145078" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="insert_tab_innumbering"><link href="text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp" name="Changing the Outline Level of Numbered and Bulleted Lists">Changing the List Level of a List Paragraph</link> +</variable></h1> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155909" xml-lang="en-US">To move a numbered or bulleted list paragraph down one list level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press <keycode>Tab</keycode>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3155859" xml-lang="en-US">To move a numbered or bulleted list paragraph up one list level, click at the beginning of the paragraph, and then press <keycode>Shift+Tab</keycode>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153403" xml-lang="en-US">To insert a tab between the number or bullet and the paragraph text for all list paragraphs at a given list level, use the <menuitem>Numbering followed by</menuitem> option in the <link href="text/shared/01/06050600.xhp" name="Position"><menuitem>Position</menuitem></link> tab in the <menuitem>Bullets and Numbering</menuitem> dialog. For an individual list paragraph, a tab can be copied and then pasted at the beginning of the list paragraph.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +</section> +<section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp#chapter_numbering"/> + <embed href="text/shared/01/06050600.xhp#positionh1"/> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f343d4a52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidejoin_numbered_listsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Combining Numbered Lists</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150495"> + <bookmark_value>numbering; combining</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>merging;numbered lists</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>joining;numbered lists</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lists;combining numbered lists</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs;numbering non-consecutive</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<h1 id="hd_id3150495" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="join_numbered_lists"><link href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp" name="Combining Numbered Lists">Combining Ordered Lists</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3149692" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can combine two ordered lists into a single list.</paragraph> + +<h2 id="hd_id3149452" xml-lang="en-US">To Combine Two Ordered Lists</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154479" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select all of the paragraphs in the lists.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155911" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <menuitem>Formatting</menuitem> Bar, click the <menuitem>Toggle Ordered List</menuitem> icon twice.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h2 id="hd_id3155870" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a Ordered List From Non-consecutive Paragraphs</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153417" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline> and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149644" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Continue to hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline>, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145102" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <menuitem>Formatting</menuitem> Bar, click the <menuitem>Toggle Ordered List</menuitem> icon twice.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<tip id="par_id751615828987862">To add selected paragraphs to an existing list, use <link href="text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp" name="Add to List"><menuitem>Format - Lists - Add to List</menuitem></link>.</tip> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd1aeb5b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidejump2statusbarxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Going to Specific Bookmark</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145778"><bookmark_value>bookmarks; positioning cursor</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>jumping;to bookmarks</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145778" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="jump2statusbar"><link href="text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp" name="Going to Specific Bookmark">Going to Specific Bookmark</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155178" role="paragraph">To go to a specific bookmark in your document, <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">hold down Ctrl and click +</caseinline><defaultinline>right-click</defaultinline></switchinline> in the <emph>Page</emph> field on the <emph>Status Bar</emph>, and then choose the bookmark.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153396" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp" name="Insert Bookmark">Insert Bookmark</link></paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6bfce4969 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidekeyboardxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility)</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3151169"><bookmark_value>keyboard; accessibility $[officename] Writer</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>accessibility; $[officename] Writer</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3151169" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="keyboard"><link href="text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp" name="Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility)">Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility)</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000099.xhp#keys"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149685" role="paragraph">Press the keys <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option +</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+<underlined character> to open a menu. In an open menu, press the underlined character to run a command. For example, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option +</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+I to open the <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> menu, and then H to insert a hyperlink.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155186" role="paragraph">To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155918" role="heading" level="2">To Insert Sections</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106AA" role="listitem">Choose <emph>View - Toolbars - Insert</emph> to open the <emph>Insert</emph> toolbar.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155870" role="listitem">Press F6 until the focus is on the + <item type="menuitem">Insert</item> toolbar.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149630" role="listitem">Press the right arrow key until the <emph>Section</emph> icon is selected.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145100" role="listitem">Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the section that you want to insert.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156237" role="listitem">Press Enter.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156253" role="paragraph">Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153367" role="heading" level="2">To Insert Text Tables</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153388" role="listitem">Press F6 until the focus is on the + <item type="menuitem">Standard</item> toolbar.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154849" role="listitem">Press the right arrow key until the <emph>Table</emph> icon is selected.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155872" role="listitem">Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155892" role="listitem">Press Enter.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1072C" role="paragraph">Press F6 to place the cursor inside the document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp#keyboard"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp#text_keys"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d607750f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideload_stylesxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using Styles From Another Document or Template</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145086"> + <bookmark_value>formatting styles; importing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>styles; importing from other files</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>importing;styles from other files</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>loading;styles from other files</bookmark_value> + </bookmark> + <h1 id="hd_id3145086"><variable id="load_styles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp" name="Using Styles From Another Document or Template">Using Styles From Another Document or Template</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph id="par_id3154491" role="paragraph">You can import styles from another document or template into the current document.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id731529889382463" role="listitem">Open the <link href="text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp" name="load_styles_link"><emph>Load Styles</emph></link> dialog box by either</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155936" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Styles - Load Styles</menuitem> or</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155910" role="listitem">Choose <emph>View - Styles</emph> or</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id441529889103330" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Styles - Manage Styles</emph> or <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command+T</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>F11</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline> to open the <emph>Styles</emph> sidebar deck.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10703" role="listitem">Click the arrow next to the <emph>Styles actions</emph> icon to open the submenu, and choose <menuitem>Load Styles</menuitem></paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149632" role="listitem">Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select <emph>Overwrite</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145098" role="listitem">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156240">Click an entry in the <emph>Categories</emph> list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the <emph>Templates</emph> list, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153377">Click <emph>From File</emph>, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, and then click name, and then click <emph>Open</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/01/05170000.xhp#load_styles_header"/> + </section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..feb19e264 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidemainxml" indexer="include"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Instructions for Using $[officename] Writer</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/main.xhp</filename> +</topic> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155855"><bookmark_value>$[officename] Writer; instructions</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>instructions; $[officename] Writer</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 id="hd_id3155855" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="main"><link href="text/swriter/guide/main.xhp" name="Instructions for Using $[officename] Writer">Instructions for Using $[officename] Writer</link> +</variable></h1> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000099.xhp#table"/> +<h2 id="hd_id3155156" xml-lang="en-US">Entering and Formatting Text</h2> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp#textmode_change"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp#text_direct_cursor"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp#text_nav_keyb"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp#insert_specialchar"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp#word_completion"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp#space_hyphen"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp#shortcut_writing"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp#text_color"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp#text_rotate"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp#text_centervert"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp#indenting"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/border_page.xhp#border_page"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp#border_paragraph"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp#border_table"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/border_object.xhp#border_object"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp#subscript"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp#text_capital"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp#dragdroptext"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp#reset_format"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp#chapter_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/arrange_chapters.xhp#arrange_chapters"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/jump2statusbar.xhp#jump2statusbar"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp#sections"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp#section_insert"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp#section_edit"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp#formatpaintbrush"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#stylist_fromselect"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp#stylist_fillformat"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp#stylist_update"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp#load_styles"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp#standard_template"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp#registertrue"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp#redlining"/> +<h2 id="hd_id3153728" xml-lang="en-US">Automatically Entering and Formatting Text</h2> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp#auto_off"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp#auto_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp#auto_spellcheck"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp#autotext"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp#autocorr_except"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp#even_odd_sdw"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp#removing_line_breaks"/> +<h2 id="hd_id3150742" xml-lang="en-US">Using Styles, Numbering Pages, Using Fields</h2> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp#pagenumbers"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#pageorientation"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#pagebackground"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp#stylist_fillformat"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#stylist_fromselect"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp#stylist_update"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp#undo_formatting"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp#hyperlink_insert"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp#page_break"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp#pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp#fields"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_enter.xhp#fields_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_userdata.xhp#fields_userdata"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/field_convert.xhp#field_convert"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/fields_date.xhp#fields_date"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3147088" xml-lang="en-US" level="2">Editing Tables in Text</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp#table_select"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp#table_insert"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp#table_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate.xhp#calculate"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp#calculate_intext"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_clipboard.xhp#calculate_clipboard"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext2.xhp#calculate_intext2"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_multitable.xhp#calculate_multitable"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp#calculate_intable"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_beforetable.xhp#insert_beforetable"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp#table_cellmerge"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp#table_repeat_multiple_headers"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp#table_sizing"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp#tablemode"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp#dragdrop_table"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp#breaking_lines"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3155590" xml-lang="en-US" level="2">Images, Drawings, ClipArt, Fontwork</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp#anchor_object"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp#captions_numbers"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp#fontwork"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp#insert_bitmap"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_dialog.xhp#insert_graphic_dialog"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromdraw.xhp#insert_graphic_fromdraw"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_gallery.xhp#insert_graphic_gallery"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_scan.xhp#insert_graphic_scan"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic_fromchart.xhp#insert_graphic_fromchart"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp#text_animation"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp#text_rotate"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/background.xhp#background"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145083" xml-lang="en-US" level="2">Table of Contents, Index</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp#globaldoc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp#indices_enter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp#indices_edit"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_delete.xhp#indices_delete"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp#indices_form"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp#indices_toc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp#indices_index"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp#indices_literature"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp#indices_userdef"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/indices_multidoc.xhp#indices_multidoc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp#navigator"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3150427" xml-lang="en-US" level="2">Headings, Types of Numbering</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp#chapter_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp#auto_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp#captions_numbers"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp#globaldoc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp#insert_tab_innumbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp#numbering_paras"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp#numbering_lines"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154464" xml-lang="en-US" level="2">Headers, Footers, Footnotes</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp#footer_pagenumber"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp#header_pagestyles"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp#footnote_usage"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/footnote_with_line.xhp#footnote_with_line"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3152948" xml-lang="en-US" level="2">Editing Other Objects in Text</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/anchor_object.xhp#anchor_object"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp#auto_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp#captions_numbers"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp#line_intext"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp#linestyles"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp#lineend_define"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp#linestyle_define"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3154324" xml-lang="en-US" level="2">Spelling, Dictionaries, Hyphenation</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp#auto_spellcheck"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp#autocorr_except"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp#delete_from_dict"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp#using_hyphen"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp#using_thesaurus"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145673" xml-lang="en-US" level="2">Form Letters, Labels and Business Cards</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp#form_letters"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/labels.xhp#labels"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp#labels_database"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp#conditional_text2"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145730" xml-lang="en-US" level="2">Working with Documents</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp#print_brochure"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp#globaldoc"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp#print_preview"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp#print_faster"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp#print_small"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp#printing_order"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp#printer_tray"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp#send2html"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp#textdoc_inframe"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp#export_ms"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp#import_ms"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/email.xhp#email"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp#workfolder"/> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3156315" xml-lang="en-US" level="2">Miscellaneous</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp#keyboard"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp#autotext"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp#smarttags"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/fax.xhp#fax"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp#pasting"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp#conditional_text"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp#conditional_text2"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/dragdroptext.xhp#dragdroptext"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp#hidden_text"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text_display.xhp#hidden_text_display"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp#nonprintable_text"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp#hyperlinks"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp#navigator"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp#resize_navigator"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp#number_date_conv"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp#print_preview"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp#print_small"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp#printer_tray"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/references.xhp#references"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp#search_regexp"/> +<comment>removed a line</comment> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp#send2html"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp#shortcut_writing"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp#text_direct_cursor"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp#textdoc_inframe"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp#words_count"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp#wrap"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp#macro_recording"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7fba988fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidenavigatorxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Navigator for Text Documents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154897"><bookmark_value>Navigator; overview in texts</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>hyperlinks;jumping to</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>objects;quickly moving to, within text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>frames;jumping to</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables;jumping to</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>headings;jumping to</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages;jumping to</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>jumping;to text elements</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>overviews;Navigator in text documents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW added "pages;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154897" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="navigator"><link href="text/swriter/guide/navigator.xhp" name="Navigator for Text Documents">Navigator for Text Documents</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153402" role="paragraph">The Navigator displays the different parts of your document, such as headings, tables, frames, objects, or hyperlinks.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154247" role="listitem">To open the <emph>Navigator</emph>, press F5.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155878" role="listitem">To quickly jump to a location in your document, double-click an item listed in the <emph>Navigator</emph> window or enter the respective page number in the spin box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp#navigator"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147108" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/02110000.xhp" name="Navigator">Navigator</link></paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eed375cdf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidenonprintable_textxhp" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Creating Non-printing Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3148856"><bookmark_value>non-printing text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; non-printable</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw copied two entries from hidden_text.xhp</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3148856" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="nonprintable_text"><link href="text/swriter/guide/nonprintable_text.xhp" name="Creating Non-printing Text">Creating Non-printing Text</link> +</variable></paragraph><comment>MW created this guide from hidden_text.xhp</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4685201" role="paragraph">To create text that is not to be printed do the following:</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149789" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Frame</item> and click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150224" role="listitem">Enter text in the frame and if you want, resize the frame.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150242" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Frame and Object - Properties</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Options</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145227" role="listitem">In the <emph>Properties</emph> area, clear the <emph>Print</emph> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150320" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3138828" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/guide/hidden_text.xhp" name="Hiding Text">Hiding Text</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e69f6230d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidenumber_date_convxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3156383"> + <bookmark_value>numbers; automatic recognition in text tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables; number recognition</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables; date formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>table cells; date formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>dates;formatting automatically in tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>recognition;numbers</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156383"><variable id="number_date_conv"><link href="text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp" name="Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables">Turning Number Recognition On or Off in Tables</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155179" role="paragraph">$[officename] can automatically recognize numbers or dates that you enter into a table cell, converting them from text to an appropriate number format. Use <menuitem>Table - Number Format</menuitem> to change the display of the entered value.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp#number_recognition_failed_or_off"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149966" role="paragraph">To enable or disable this feature, do one of the following:</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155919" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Table - Number Recognition</menuitem>.</paragraph> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id531605970858214">When this feature is on, a check mark is displayed in front of the <menuitem>Number Recognition</menuitem> command.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155527" role="listitem">Choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</caseinline><defaultinline>Tools - Options</defaultinline></switchinline> - <menuitem>%PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table</menuitem>, and select or clear the <menuitem>Number Recognition</menuitem> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id781605970689063">This feature applies globally to all tables in all documents. When enabled, typing a date or number into a table cell will result in automatic formatting. Enabling and disabling this feature does not change existing data formatting.</paragraph> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153415" role="paragraph"><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</caseinline><defaultinline>Tools - Options</defaultinline></switchinline> - <link href="text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp" name="Text Document - Table">%PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eea42da16 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidenumber_sequencexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Defining Number Ranges</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149695"> + <bookmark_value>numbering;quotations/similar items</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW deleted "number ranges;" and changed "numbering;"</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149695" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="number_sequence"><link href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp" name="Defining Number Ranges">Defining Number Ranges</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155918" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can automatically number similar items, such as quotations, in your document.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149829" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type the text that you want to assign numbering to, for example, "Quotation Number ".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155048" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Field - More Fields</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Variables</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="3"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156240" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click "Number range" in the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153363" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type "Quotation" in the <item type="menuitem">Name</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153387" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154250" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a number in the <emph>Value</emph> box, or leave the box empty to use automatic numbering.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154851" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the outline level where you want the numbering to restart in the <emph>Level </emph>box.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="6"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>, and then click <emph>Close</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..677a66084 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidenumbering_linesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Adding Line Numbers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150101"> + <bookmark_value>line numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; line numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs;line numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lines of text; numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>numbering; lines</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>numbers; line numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>marginal numbers on text pages</bookmark_value> + </bookmark> + <h1 id="hd_id3150101"><variable id="numbering_lines"><link href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp" name="Adding Line Numbers">Adding Line Numbers</link></variable></h1> + <paragraph id="par_id3149842" role="paragraph">$[officename] can insert line numbers in an entire document or to selected paragraphs in your document. Line numbers are included when you print your document. You can specify the line numbering interval, the starting line number, and whether to count blank lines or lines in frames. You can also add a separator between line numbers.</paragraph> + <note id="par_id7184972">Line numbers are not available in HTML format.</note> + + <h2 id="hd_id3153410">To Add Line Numbers to an Entire Document</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149640" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Tools - Line Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149612" role="listitem">Select <emph>Show numbering</emph>, and then select the options that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145101" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + + <h2 id="hd_id3156241">To Add Line Numbers to Specific Paragraphs</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156264" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Tools - Line Numbering</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153385" role="listitem">Select <emph>Show numbering</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154248" role="listitem">Press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command+T + </caseinline><defaultinline>F11</defaultinline></switchinline> to open the <emph>Styles</emph> window, and then click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154853" role="listitem">Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3150222" role="listitem">All paragraph styles are based on the "Default" style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + + <list type="ordered" startwith="5"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150931" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Outline & List</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150956" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Line Numbering</item> area, clear the <item type="menuitem">Include this paragraph in line numbering</item> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150520" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151077" role="listitem">Select the paragraph(s) where you want to add the line numbers.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151096" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Outline & Numbering</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153733" role="listitem">Select <emph>Include this paragraph in line numbering</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153758" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph id="par_id3146864" role="paragraph">You can also create a paragraph style that includes line numbering, and apply it to the paragraphs that you want to add line numbers to.</paragraph> + + <h2 id="hd_id3146880">To Specify the Starting Line Number</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150703" role="listitem">Click in a paragraph.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150721" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Format - Paragraph</menuitem>, and then click the <menuitem>Outline & List</menuitem> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148389" role="listitem">Select the <item type="menuitem">Include this paragraph in line numbering</item> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148414" role="listitem">Select <item type="menuitem">Restart at the paragraph</item> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153779" role="listitem">Enter a line number in the <item type="menuitem">Start with</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153804" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <paragraph id="par_id3153934" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/06180000.xhp" name="Tools - Line Numbering">Tools - Line Numbering</link></paragraph> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> + <paragraph id="par_id3153960" role="paragraph">Format - Paragraph - <link href="text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp" name="Numbering_link">Outline & List</link></paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id2212591" role="paragraph"><link href="https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Documentation/How_Tos/Setting_up_a_Style_for_Numbering_Lines_in_Code_Listings" name="wiki.documentfoundation.org Setting up a Style for Numbering Lines in Code Listings">Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles</link></paragraph> + </section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddf4c84e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidenumbering_parasxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Modifying Numbering in an Ordered List</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149637"> + <bookmark_value>numbering; removing/interrupting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>bullet lists; interrupting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lists;removing/interrupting numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;numbers in lists</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>interrupting numbered lists</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>changing;starting numbers in lists</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...", and deleted "modifying;..."</comment> + +<h1 id="hd_id3149637" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="numbering_paras"><link href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp" name="Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List">Modifying Numbering in an Ordered List</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3145092" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in an ordered list or change the number that an ordered list starts with.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp#chapter_numbering_tip"/> + +<h2 id="hd_id3145107" xml-lang="en-US">To Remove the Number From a Paragraph in an Ordered List</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156248" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153366" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153390" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154248" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the <emph>No List</emph> icon on the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<h2 id="hd_id3154856" xml-lang="en-US">To Change the Number That an Ordered List Starts With</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155877" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click anywhere in the ordered list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155895" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <menuitem>Format - Bullets and Numbering</menuitem>, and then click the <menuitem>Customize</menuitem> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148691" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter the number you want the list to start with in the <item type="menuitem">Start at</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147116" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +<paragraph id="par_id6943571" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Documentation/How_Tos/Setting_up_a_Style_for_Numbering_Lines_in_Code_Listings" name="wiki.documentfoundation.org Setting up a Style for Numbering Lines in Code Listings">Wiki page about numbering paragraphs by styles</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9c6b50ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidepage_breakxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> +<body> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155183"> + <bookmark_value>inserting; page breaks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting;page breaks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages; inserting/deleting page breaks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>manual page breaks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables;deleting page breaks before</bookmark_value> + </bookmark> + <h1 id="hd_id3155183"><variable id="page_break"><link href="text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp" name="Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks">Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks</link> +</variable></h1> + <h2 id="hd_id3149833">To Insert a Manual Page Break</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153402" role="listitem">Click in your document where you want the new page to begin.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153119" role="listitem">Press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline><keycode>+Enter</keycode>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 id="hd_id3153135">To Delete a Manual Page Break</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149641" role="listitem">Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149608" role="listitem">Press Backspace.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 id="hd_id3149624">To Delete a Manual Page Break That Occurs Before a Table</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145111" role="listitem">Right-click in the table, and choose <emph>Table</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156254" role="listitem">Click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp" name="Text Flow"><emph>Text Flow</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153380" role="listitem">Clear the <emph>Break</emph> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 id="hd_id151633462071702">To Quickly Switch Between Portrait and Landscape Page Layout</h2> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#quick_orientation"/> + <tip id="par_id121633463140208">Read the help page <link href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp" name="pageorientation_link">Changing Page Orientation</link> to learn more about advanced configurations that can be defined concerning page orientation.</tip> + + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp#pagenumbers"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/01/04010000.xhp#ManualBreak_h1"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#pageorientation"/> + </section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08909788e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidepagebackgroundxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Changing Page Backgrounds</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id8431653"> + <bookmark_value>page styles;backgrounds</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>backgrounds; different pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>changing;page backgrounds</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages;backgrounds</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW deleted "page backgrounds"</comment> + +<paragraph id="par_idN107F4" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="pagebackground"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp">Changing Page Background</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_idN10812" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages.</paragraph> + +<section id="define"> + +<paragraph id="par_idN10820" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Change the Page Background</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10827" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <menuitem>View - Styles</menuitem> <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>(Command+T)</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>(F11)</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1082F" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10837" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1083F" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1084B" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10855" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10859" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="6"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1085F" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Area</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10867" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1086B" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +</section> + +<paragraph id="par_idN1087A" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_idN1087E" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10892" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <menuitem>View - Styles</menuitem> <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>(Command+T)</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>(F11)</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1089A" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108A2" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="par_idN108A5" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_idN108A9" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#define">To Change the Page Background</link> for details.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108BD" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108C1" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <menuitem>Insert - Manual Break</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108C9" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108D1" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> box, select a page style that uses the page background.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108DB" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108DF" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_idN108E2" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="5"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN108E8" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/swriter/01/watermark.xhp#wm01"/> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e10d00314 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidepagenumbersxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Page Numbers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id5918759"><bookmark_value>page numbers;inserting/defining/formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>page styles;page numbering</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>starting page numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting;page numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining;starting page numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;page numbers</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>styles;page numbers</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw inserted six index entries</comment><comment>mw added "styles;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id413830" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="pagenumbers"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp" name="Page Numbers">Page Numbers</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1617175" role="paragraph">In Writer, a page number is a field that you can insert into your text.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6091494" role="heading" level="2">To Insert Page Numbers</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8611102" role="paragraph">Choose <menuitem>Insert - Page Number</menuitem> to insert a page number at the current cursor position.</paragraph> + <tip xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6604510">If you see the text "Page number" instead of the number, choose <menuitem>View - Field Names</menuitem> (<switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command+F9</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl+F9</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline>).</tip> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2678914" role="paragraph">However, these fields will change position when you add or remove text. So it is best to insert the page number field into a header or footer that has the same position and that is repeated on every page.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id614642" role="paragraph">Choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header and Footer - Header - (name of page style)</item> or <item type="menuitem">Insert - Header and Footer - Footer - (name of page style)</item> to add a header or footer to all pages with the current page style.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id2551652" role="heading" level="2">To Start With a Defined Page Number</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6111941" role="paragraph">Now you want some more control on page numbers. You are writing a text document that should start with page number 12.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5757621" role="listitem">Click into the first paragraph of your document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2632831" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Format - Paragraph - Text flow</menuitem> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4395275" role="listitem">In the Breaks area, enable <emph>Insert</emph>. Enable <emph>With Page Style</emph> just to be able to set the new <emph>Page number</emph>. Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1654408" role="note">The new page number is an attribute of the first paragraph of the page.</paragraph> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id7519150">To Select the Page Number Format</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9029206" role="paragraph">You want roman page numbers running i, ii, iii, iv, and so on.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3032319" role="listitem">Double-click directly before the page number field. You see the <emph>Edit Fields</emph> dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9139378" role="listitem">Select a number format and click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id5051728">Using Different Page Number Formats in Headers and Footers</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1558885" role="paragraph">You need some pages with the roman numbering format, followed by the remaining pages in another format.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1541184" role="paragraph">In Writer, you will need different page styles. The first page style has a footer with a page number field formatted for roman numbers. The following page style has a footer with a page number field formatted in another look.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id18616" role="paragraph">Both page styles must be separated by a page break. In Writer, you can have automatic page breaks and manually inserted page breaks.</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6138492" role="paragraph">An <emph>automatic page break</emph> appears at the end of a page when the page style has a different "next style".</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4569231" role="paragraph">For example, the "First Page" page style has "Default Page Style" as the next style. To see this, you may press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command+T</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>F11</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline> to open the <item type="menuitem">Styles</item> window, click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon, right-click the "First Page" entry. Choose <item type="menuitem">Modify</item> from the context menu. On the <item type="menuitem">Organizer</item> tab, you can see the "Next style".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id291451" role="paragraph">A <emph>manually inserted page break</emph> can be applied without or with a change of page styles.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3341776" role="paragraph">If you just press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command+Enter</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl+Enter</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline>, you apply a page break without a change of styles.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5947141" role="paragraph">If you choose <menuitem>Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break</menuitem>, you can insert a page break without or with a change of style or with a change of page number.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1911679" role="paragraph">It depends on your document what is best: to use a manually inserted page break between page styles, or to use an automatic change. If you just need one title page with a different style than the other pages, you can use the automatic method:</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id9364909" role="heading" level="3">To Apply a Different Page Style to the First Page</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4473403" role="listitem">Click into the first page of your document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4313791" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>View - Styles</menuitem> (<switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command+T</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>F11</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline>).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4331797" role="listitem">In the <emph>Styles</emph> window, click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4191717" role="listitem">Double-click the "First Page" style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2318796" role="paragraph">Now your title page has the style "First Page", and the next pages automatically have the "Default Page Style".</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id399182" role="paragraph">You can now for example insert a footer for the "Default Page Style" only, or insert footers in both page styles, but with differently formatted page number fields.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id5298318" role="heading" level="3">To Apply a Manually Inserted Page Style Change</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7588732" role="listitem">Click at the start of the first paragraph on the page where a different page style will be applied.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id95828" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break</emph>. You see the <emph>Insert Break</emph> dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3496200" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Style</item> list box, select a page style. You may set a new page number, too. Click <item type="menuitem">OK</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7599108" role="paragraph">The selected page style will be used from the current paragraph to the next page break with style. You may need to create the new page style first.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp#footer_pagenumber"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp#even_odd_sdw"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5d2500bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidepageorientationxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Changing Page Orientation (Landscape or Portrait)</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> +<body> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id9683828"><bookmark_value>page styles;orientation/scope</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>page formats; changing individual pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting; changing individual pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>portrait and landscape</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>landscape and portrait</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>printing;portrait/landscape format</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>orientation of pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paper orientation</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages;orientation</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>sideways orientation of pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>scope of page styles</bookmark_value> + </bookmark> +<h1 id="par_idN106FF"><variable id="pageorientation"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp">Changing Page Orientation</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6418042" role="paragraph">All page properties for Writer text documents, like for example the page orientation, are defined by page styles. By default, a new text document uses the “Default” page style for all pages. If you open an existing text document, different page styles may have been applied to the different pages. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8324533" role="paragraph">It is important to know that changes that you apply to a page property will only affect the pages that use the current page style. The current page style is listed in the Status Bar at the lower window border.</paragraph> + <h2 id="par_id7524033">To Change the Page Orientation for All Pages</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6307260" role="paragraph">If your text document consists only of pages with the same page style, you can change the page properties directly:</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5256508" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Format - Page Style</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9681997" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Page</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7994323" role="listitem">Under <item type="menuitem">Paper format</item>, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7069002" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 id="hd_id4202398">To Change the Page Orientation Only for Some Pages</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1071D" role="paragraph">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. Page styles define more page properties, as for example header and footer or page margins. You can either change the “Default” page style for the current document, or you can define own page styles and apply those page styles to any parts of your text. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1449324" role="paragraph">At the end of this help page, we'll discuss the scope of page styles in detail. If you are unsure about the page style concept, please read the section at the end of this page.</paragraph> + <note id="par_id1480758">Unlike character styles or paragraph styles, the page styles don't know a hierarchy. You can create a new page style based on the properties of an existing page style, but when you later change the source style, the new page style does not automatically inherit the changes.</note> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2962126" role="paragraph">To change the page orientation for all pages that share the same page style, you first need a page style, then apply that style:</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10727" role="listitem">Choose <emph>View - Styles</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10741" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10749" role="listitem">Right-click a page style and choose <emph>New</emph>. The new page style initially gets all properties of the selected page style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10751" role="listitem">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab page, type a name for the page style in the <emph>Name</emph> box, for example "My Landscape".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1075D" role="listitem">In the <emph>Next Style</emph> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page that follows a page with the new style. See the section about the scope of page styles at the end of this help page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10775" role="listitem">Click the <emph>Page</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1077D" role="listitem">Under <item type="menuitem">Paper format</item>, select “Portrait” or “Landscape”.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN108AE" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1658375" role="listitem">Now you have defined a proper page style with the name "My Landscape". To apply the new style, double-click the "My Landscape" page style in the <emph>Styles</emph> window. All pages in the current scope of page styles will be changed. If you defined the "next style" to be a different style, only the first page of the current scope of page styles will be changed.</paragraph> + + <h2 id="hd_id151633462071702">To Quickly Switch Between Portrait and Landscape Page Layout</h2> + <section id="quick_orientation"> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id51633462108943">The default template provided by %PRODUCTNAME Writer offers several page layout styles, among which the <emph>Default Page Style</emph> has Portrait orientation and the <emph>Landscape</emph> style has landscape orientation.</paragraph> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id321633462254730">These styles can be used to quickly switch between portrait and landscape orientation by inserting manual breaks and choosing the appropriate page styles as described below:</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id21633462303911" role="listitem">Place the cursor where the page break is to be inserted.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id841633462305362" role="listitem">Go to <menuitem>Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break</menuitem>. The <emph>Insert Break</emph> dialog will open.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id31633462305839" role="listitem">Choose the option <emph>Page break</emph> and in the <emph>Page Style</emph> drop-down list choose the page style to be applied to the page after the break (Default Page Style, Landscape, etc).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id51633462306574" role="listitem">If the applied has to be changed again at a certain point in the document (for instance, to switch back from landscape to portrait orientation), place the cursor at this point and repeat the steps previously described.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + </section> + + <section id="scope"> + <h2 id="hd_id6082949">The Scope of Page Styles</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2858668" role="paragraph">You should be aware of the scope of page styles in %PRODUCTNAME. Which pages of your text document get affected by editing a page style?</paragraph> + <h3 id="hd_id3278603">One Page Long Styles</h3> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5169225" role="paragraph">A page style can be defined to span one page only. The “First Page” style is an example. You set this property by defining another page style to be the "next style", on the <menuitem>Format - Page Style - Organizer</menuitem> tab page.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6670125" role="paragraph">A one page long style starts from the lower border of the current page style range up to the next page break. The next page break appears automatically when the text flows to the next page, which is sometimes called a "soft page break". Alternatively, you can insert a manual page break.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2118594" role="paragraph">To insert a manual page break at the cursor position, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline><keycode>+Enter</keycode> or choose <menuitem>Insert - Manual Break</menuitem> and just click OK.</paragraph> + <h3 id="hd_id166020">Manually Defined Range of a Page style</h3> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6386913" role="paragraph">The “Default” page style does not set a different "next style" on the <menuitem>Format - Page Style - Organizer</menuitem> tab page. Instead, the "next style" is set also to be “Default”. All page styles that are followed by the same page style can span multiple pages. The lower and upper borders of the page style range are defined by "page breaks with style". All the pages between any two "page breaks with style" use the same page style.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6062196" role="paragraph">You can insert a "page break with style" directly at the cursor position. Alternatively, you can apply the "page break with style" property to a paragraph or to a paragraph style.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6054261" role="paragraph">Perform any one of the following commands:</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1811578" role="listitem">To insert a "page break with style" at the cursor position, choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Manual Break</item>, select a <emph>Style</emph> name from the listbox, and click OK.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id9935911" role="listitem">To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Paragraph - Text Flow</item>. In the Breaks area, activate <emph>Enable</emph> and <emph>With Page Style</emph>. Select a page style name from the listbox.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4753868" role="listitem">To apply the "page break with style" property to the current paragraph style, right-click the current paragraph. Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit Paragraph Style</item> from the context menu. Click the <emph>Text Flow</emph> tab. In the Breaks area, activate <emph>Enable</emph> and <emph>With Page Style</emph>. Select a page style name from the listbox.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4744407" role="listitem">To apply the "page break with style" property to an arbitrary paragraph style, choose <item type="menuitem">View - Styles</item>. Click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon. Right-click the name of the paragraph style you want to modify and choose <emph>Modify</emph>. Click the <emph>Text Flow</emph> tab. In the Breaks area, activate <emph>Enable</emph> and <emph>With Page Style</emph>. Select a page style name from the listbox.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + </section> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5e77e0df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidepagestylesxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating and Applying Page Styles</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id7071138"> + <bookmark_value>page styles;creating and applying</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>defining;page styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>styles;for pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>overriding next style;for pages</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<h1 id="hd_id3155182" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="pagestyles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp" name="Creating and Applying Page Styles">Creating and Applying Page Styles</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3149846" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page.</paragraph> + +<h2 id="hd_id3156109" xml-lang="en-US">To Define a New Page Style</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153411" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <menuitem>View - Styles</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153133" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Page Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149641" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose <emph>New</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149614" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <emph>Organizer</emph> tab, type a name in the <emph>Name</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145110" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156252" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153376" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the <emph>Next Style</emph> box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style.</paragraph> + </listitem></list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="6"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h2 id="hd_id3154851" xml-lang="en-US">To Apply a Page Style</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154873" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id471615462517274" role="listitem">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155888" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <menuitem>View - Styles</menuitem>, and then click the <menuitem>Page Style</menuitem> icon.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3148685" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Double-click a name in the list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id891615460923756" role="listitem">Right-click the page style displayed in the <link href="text/shared/01/03060000" name="Status Bar">Status Bar</link>. Select another page style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + +<h2 id="hd_id181615419889677">To Manually Override the “Next style” of a Page Style</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id601615419994433" role="listitem">Place cursor between the page with the page style and the page with the style specified in <emph>Next style</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id301615420000676" role="listitem">Right-click and choose <menuitem>Edit Page Break</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id271615420006519" role="listitem">Select the <emph>With page style</emph> checkbox.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id601615420013170" role="listitem">Enter the page style to be applied.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id231615420303511">See <link href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#scope" name="Next Style">Manually Defined Range of a Page style</link>.</paragraph> + +<note id="par_id891615463137607"> A special situation arises when a <emph>Next style</emph> is different than the page style itself, and you want to apply that page style to two consecutive pages. For example, if you have applied <emph>First Page</emph> style to a page, and want to apply First Page style again to the immediately following page, then you must manually override First Page style, because it is configured to be followed by <emph>Default Page Style</emph>.</note> + +<h2 id="hd_id3148701" xml-lang="en-US">To Apply a Page Style to a New Page</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147122" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want a new page to start.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150210" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <menuitem>Insert - More Breaks - Manual Break</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150235" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select <emph>Page break</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150939" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <menuitem>Page Style</menuitem> box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150965" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp#pagenumbers"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_chapter.xhp#header_with_chapter"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp#header_footer"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/header_with_line.xhp#header_with_line"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp#standard_template"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp#pageorientation"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp#pagebackground"/> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e11774fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideprint_brochurexhp" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Printing a Brochure</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id6743064"><bookmark_value>printing; individual brochures</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>booklet printing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>brochures; printing individual</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN105F6"><variable id="print_brochure"><link href="text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp">Printing a Brochure</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10614" role="paragraph">You can print a Writer document as a brochure or a booklet. That is, Writer prints two pages on each side of the paper, so that when you fold the paper, you can read the document as a book.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106DE" role="paragraph">When you create a document that you want to print as a brochure, use portrait orientation for the pages. Writer applies the brochure layout when you print the document.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id871605701051745">%PRODUCTNAME is not designed to handle brochure printing of documents that include landscape page orientations, but it is possible to print such documents.</paragraph> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id191605701997366">It is not possible to print a large image across two pages. Cut the image into two parts, and insert each part on different pages.</paragraph> +<h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1061A">To Print a Brochure</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10621" role="listitem">Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106B6" role="listitem">In the <emph>Print</emph> dialog, click <emph>Properties</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1070E" role="listitem">In the properties dialog for your printer, set the paper orientation to landscape.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id8947416" role="tip">If your printer prints duplex, and because brochures always print in landscape mode, you should use the "duplex - short edge" setting in your printer setup dialog.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered" startwith="4"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10628" role="listitem">Return to <emph>Print</emph> dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1062C" role="listitem">In the <emph>Page Layout</emph> section, select <emph>Brochure</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10740" role="listitem">For a printer that automatically prints on both sides of a page, specify in the <emph>Range and Copies</emph> section to include <emph>Odd and Even Pages</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <list type="ordered" startwith="7"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10630" role="listitem">Click <emph>Print</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp#brochure"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106EA" role="note">If %PRODUCTNAME prints the pages in the wrong order, select <emph>Print in reverse order</emph> in the <emph>Range and Copies</emph> section, and then print the document again.</paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9dc17c276 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideprint_previewxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Previewing a Page Before Printing</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155179"><bookmark_value>printing; previews</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>previews; print layouts</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>print layout checks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>book view</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages;previews</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW changed "page views" to "pages;previews"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155179" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="print_preview"><link href="text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp" name="Previewing a Page Before Printing">Previewing a Page Before Printing</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149847" role="listitem">Choose <emph>File - Print Preview</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155055" role="listitem">Use the zoom icons on the <emph>Print Preview</emph> bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1067F" role="tip">To print your document scaled down, set the print options on the <emph>Page Layout</emph> tab page of the <item type="menuitem">File - Print</item> dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145093" role="listitem">Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the <emph>Print Preview</emph> bar to scroll through the document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp#print_small"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154265" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/01120000.xhp" name="File - Print Preview">File - Print Preview</link>.</paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6902aef23 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at https://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="printingpageranges" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Selecting What to Print</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id541605272263762"> +<bookmark_value>selecting; pages to print</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>printing;page range</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>printing;selection</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<h1 id="hd_id721605269733190"><variable id="printselection"><link href="text/swriter/guide/print_selection.xhp" name="print_selection_link">Selecting What to Print</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id501605271321756">You can choose to print individual pages, a range of pages, or a selection from a document.</paragraph> +<h2 id="hd_id601605269573468">Printing a single page</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id571605684186001" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>File - Print</menuitem> to open the <emph>Print</emph> dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id31605269603220" role="listitem">In the <emph>Range and Copies</emph> section, select the <emph>Pages</emph> option. The text box will show the current page number.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id251605269806172" role="listitem">Enter the page number you want to print.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id641605269861744" role="listitem">The preview box on the left shows the selected page. +</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h2 id="hd_id171605269647972">Printing a range of pages</h2> +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id731605685039891" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>File - Print</menuitem> to open the <emph>Print</emph> dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id261605269669284" role="listitem">In the <emph>Range and Copies</emph> section, select the <emph>Pages</emph> option. The text box will show the current page number.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id331605269672260" role="listitem">Enter the page numbers to print.</paragraph> + <section id="sublist"> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id481605270284520" role="listitem">Use <literal>-</literal> for a range of pages. For example, <input>1-4</input> prints all pages from 1 to 4.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id651605685305228">Partial ranges are also allowed: <input>-5</input> prints all pages up to page 5; <input>10-</input> prints from page 10 to end of document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id951605270474391" role="listitem">Use <literal>,</literal> or <literal>;</literal> for a list of pages. For example, <input>1,3;7</input> prints pages 1, 3 and 7. Spaces are optional: <input>1, 3, 7</input> also works.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id611605270697509" role="listitem">Combinations are also possible. For example, <input>1, 3, 5-10, 15-</input> prints pages 1,3, 5 to 10, and 15 to end of document.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + </section> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id581605269685019" role="listitem">The preview box on the left shows the selected pages.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h2 id="hd_id571605269596899">Printing a selection of text or graphics</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id261605270158305" role="listitem"> Select the content to print.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id481605687683495" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>File - Print</menuitem> to open the <emph>Print</emph> dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id911605270164153" role="listitem">In the <emph>Range and Copies</emph> section, choose the <emph>Selection</emph> option.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id871605270949919" role="listitem">The preview box shows the selected material.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> +</body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3a287f8d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideprint_smallxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149694"><bookmark_value>multi-page view of documents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages;printing multiple on one sheet</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>overviews;printing multi-page view</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>printing;multiple pages per sheet</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>reduced printing of multiple pages</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment> MW changed "overviews;"</comment> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149694"><variable id="print_small"><link href="text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp" name="Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet">Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149829" role="paragraph">In the <emph>Page Layout</emph> section of the <menuitem>File - Print</menuitem> dialog, you have the option to print multiple pages on one sheet.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156098" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>File - Print</menuitem></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155055" role="listitem">In the <emph>Page Layout</emph> section, do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149603" role="listitem">To print two pages side by side on the same sheet, select "2" in the <emph>Pages per sheet</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153388" role="listitem">To print multiple pages on the same sheet, select the number of pages per sheet and optionally set the order of pages. The small preview shows the arrangement of pages. </paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <list type="ordered" startwith="3"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154841" role="listitem">Click <emph>Print</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp#print_preview"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150004" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/main0210.xhp" name="File - Print Preview">File - Print Preview</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..878c9f302 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideprinter_trayxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Selecting printer paper trays</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id6609088"> + <bookmark_value>selecting;paper trays</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paper tray selection</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw made "paper trays;..." a one level entry</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155909" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="printer_tray"><link href="text/swriter/guide/printer_tray.xhp" name="Selecting printer paper trays">Selecting Printer Paper Trays</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155858" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Use page styles to specify different paper sources for different pages in your document.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149841" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>View - Styles</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156108" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <item type="menuitem">Page Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155066" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click the page style in the list that you want to specify the paper source for, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153416" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Paper tray</item> box, select the paper tray that you want to use.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153140" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149649" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Repeat steps 1-5 for each page style that you want to specify the paper for.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149616" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Apply the page style to the pages that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp#print_preview"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3154260" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp" name="Creating and applying page styles">Creating and applying page styles</link></paragraph> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aac6b5646 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideprinting_orderxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Printing in Reverse Order</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149688"><bookmark_value>ordering;printing in reverse order</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>printing; reverse order</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149688" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="printing_order"><link href="text/swriter/guide/printing_order.xhp" name="Printing in Reverse Order">Printing in Reverse Order</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155854" role="listitem">Choose <emph>File - Print</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149836" role="listitem">Click the <emph>General</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156106" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Print in reverse page order</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153418" role="listitem">Click <emph>Print</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/print_small.xhp#print_small"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149616" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/01130000.xhp" name="Printing">Printing</link></paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bf9bf2bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideprotectionxhp" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150620"> + <bookmark_value>indexes;unprotecting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables of contents;unprotecting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables;protecting/unprotecting cells</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>sections;protecting/unprotecting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>unprotecting tables of contents and indexes</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>protecting;tables and sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cells;protecting/unprotecting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>document;protection from changes</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<h1 id="hd_id6007263"><variable id="protection"><link href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp" name="Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer">Protecting Contents in %PRODUCTNAME Writer</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id1924802" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer from being modified or deleted.</paragraph> + +<h2 id="hd_id3150114">Protecting Sections in <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer</h2> +<paragraph id="par_id3150592" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Any section of a <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer text document can be protected against changes, and with an optional password.</paragraph> +<warning id="par_id4545426"><variable id="protwarn">Protection is not intended to be an information security protection, it is a switch to prevent accidental changes.</variable></warning> + +<h3 id="hd_id1811201610293"><variable id="turnon">Turning on protection</variable></h3> +<paragraph id="par_id1811201645676" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Information to protect must be in a section. To create or select a section:</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id181120161920589" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If the section does not exist: Select the text, then choose menu <item type="menuitem">Insert - Section...</item> .</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id181120164739204" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If the section already exists: <variable id="gotosection">Choose menu <item type="menuitem">Format - Sections...</item> and select the section in the list <emph>Section</emph>, or right-click on the section in the Navigator and choose <item type="menuitem">Edit...</item>.</variable></paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id1811201645678" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To enable protection</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id181120164720479" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want to protect the contents without a password, choose the <emph>Protect</emph> check box under the <emph>Write protection</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id181120164720412" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If you want the protection with a password, choose <emph>Protect</emph> and <emph>With password</emph> check boxes and click on the <emph>Password…</emph> button. Enter and confirm a password of at least five characters.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h3 id="hd_id1811201610294">Modification of protection</h3> +<paragraph id="par_id18112016456789" role="paragraph" localize="false" xml-lang="en-US"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp#gotosection"/></paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id18112016456780" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If the protection does not have a password and you would like to use one, choose the <emph>With password</emph> checkbox, click the <emph>Password</emph> button, and enter and confirm a password of at least five characters.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id18112016234567" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If the protection has a password and you want to clear it, uncheck the <emph>With password</emph> box under <emph>Write protection</emph> and enter the correct password.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id18112016234566" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">If the section is protected with a password and you want to change it, click on the <emph>Password</emph> button in the <emph>Edit Sections</emph> window and enter the correct password twice.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h3 id="hd_id1811201610295"><variable id="turnoff">Turning off protection</variable></h3> +<paragraph id="par_id18112016456781" role="tablecontent" localize="false" xml-lang="en-US"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp#gotosection"/></paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id18112016345678" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">If the protection does not have a password, uncheck the <emph>Protect</emph> box under <emph>Write protection</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id19112016123456" role="tablecontent" xml-lang="en-US">If the protection has a password, uncheck the <emph>Protect</emph> box under <emph>Write protection</emph> and enter the correct password.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h2 id="hd_id3146081">Protecting Cells in a <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer Table</h2> +<paragraph id="par_id3154480" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can protect the contents of individual cells of tables or whole table in <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer from changes.</paragraph> +<warning id="par_id363170" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp#protwarn"/></warning> + +<h3 id="par_id3154360" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp#turnon"/></h3> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145643" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For one or several cells, place the cursor in a cell or select needed several cells. Choose the <item type="menuitem">Table - Protect Cells</item> in menu bar.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id1911201610283" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For whole table, select the table, and choose the <item type="menuitem">Table - Protect Cells</item> in menu bar.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h3 id="par_id3150042" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp#turnoff"/></h3> +<note id="par_id3155178"><variable id="firstof">If necessary, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><item type="menuitem">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</item> +</caseinline><defaultinline><item type="menuitem">Tools - Options</item></defaultinline></switchinline><item type="menuitem"> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</item> and select <emph>Enable cursor</emph> under the <emph>Protected Areas</emph>.</variable></note> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id1711201619364829" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Place the cursor in the cell or in the selected cells and choose the <item type="menuitem">Table - Unprotect Cells</item> in menu bar.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151189" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">For whole table, right-click on the table in the Navigator, and choose <emph>Table - Unprotect</emph> in the context menu or select the whole table and choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Unprotect Cells</item> in menu bar.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h2 id="hd_id3149259">Contents Protection in Tables of Contents and Indexes</h2> +<paragraph id="par_id3153966" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Tables of contents and indexes created in <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer, are automatically protected against accidental changes.</paragraph> +<warning id="par_id814539" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp#protwarn"/></warning> + +<h3 id="par_id3145767" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp#turnon"/></h3> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3159088" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click in the index or table of contents. Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit Index...</item> in the context menu. Choose <emph>Protected against manual changes</emph> on the <emph>Type</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id181120162840123" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click on the index or table of contents in the Navigator and choose <emph>Index - Read-only</emph> item.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h3 id="par_id3154118" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp#turnoff"/></h3> +<note id="par_id3148463" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp#firstof"/></note> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3152968" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click in the index or table of contents. Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit Index...</item> in the context menu. Uncheck <emph>Protected against manual changes</emph> on the <emph>Type</emph> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3152774" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Right-click in the index or table of contents in the Navigator and uncheck <emph>Index - Read-only</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<h2 id="hd_id641630957309611">Protecting fields and bookmarks from changes</h2> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id621630957319188">Choose <menuitem>Tools - Protect Document - Protect Fields</menuitem> to protect all fields against changes. Use this protection to prevent accidental changes in fields.</paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id111630957324575">Choose <menuitem>Tools - Protect Document - Protect Bookmarks</menuitem> to protect all bookmarks against changes. Use this protection to prevent accidental bookmark changes.</paragraph> + +<h2 id="hd_id1811201623985">Protection of the whole <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer document from changes.</h2> +<paragraph id="par_id31544811" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can protect the contents of <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> Writer document from changes, with one of the following file formats: .doc, .docx, .odt, .ott.</paragraph> +<warning id="par_id18112016398104" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp#protwarn"/></warning> +<paragraph id="par_id18112016812973" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To enable the protection of the whole document, go to <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph> +</caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility</emph> and choose <emph>Protect form</emph>. To disable protection, uncheck it.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp#redlining_protect"/> +<paragraph id="par_idN10B8C" role="paragraph" localize="false" xml-lang="en-US"> <embedvar href="text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp#digital_signatures"/> </paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id7858516" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/guide/protection.xhp">Protecting Other Contents</link></paragraph> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d3e0522b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidereferencesxml" indexer="include"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Cross-References</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/references.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145087"> + <bookmark_value>references; inserting cross-references</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cross-references; inserting and updating</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables; cross-referencing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pictures; cross-referencing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>objects; cross-referencing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>OLE objects;cross-referencing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>draw objects;cross-referencing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>updating;cross-references</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;cross-references</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145087" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="references"><link href="text/swriter/guide/references.xhp" name="Inserting Cross-References">Inserting Cross-References</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3159263" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Cross-references allow you to jump to specific text passages and objects in a single document. A cross-reference consists of a target and a reference that are inserted as <link href="text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp" name="fields">fields</link> in the document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155860" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Objects with captions and bookmarks can be used as targets.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149833" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Cross-Referencing Text</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149846" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Before you can insert a cross-reference, you must first specify the targets in your text.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3156105" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a Target</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153408" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the text that you want to use as a target for the cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153125" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149634" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Type</item> list, select “Set Reference”.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149614" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Type a name for the target in the <emph>Name</emph> box. The selected text is displayed in the <emph>Value</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145110" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <item type="menuitem">Insert</item>. The name of the target is added to the <item type="menuitem">Selection</item> list.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3156257" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Leave the dialog open and proceed to the next section.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153370" role="heading" level="3" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a Cross-Reference to a Target</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id7032074" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Position the cursor in the text where you want to insert a cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id7796868" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph> to open the dialog, if it is not open already.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153392" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Type</emph> list, select "Insert Reference".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154256" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Selection</emph> list, select the target that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154856" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Refer using</emph> list, select the format for the cross-reference. The <link href="text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp" name="format">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the target text, and "Page" inserts the page number where the target is located. For footnotes the footnote number is inserted.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155895" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3148685" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Close</emph> when finished.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149980" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Cross-Referencing an Object</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149992" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can cross-reference most objects in your document, such as graphics, drawing objects, OLE objects, and tables, so long as they have a caption. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose <link href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp" name="Insert - Caption"><emph>Insert - Caption</emph></link>.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3147123" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want to insert the cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150212" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Cross-reference</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150236" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Type</emph> list, select the caption category of the object.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150942" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Selection</emph> list, select the caption number of the object that you want to cross-reference.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150968" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <emph>Refer using</emph> list, select the format of the cross-reference. The <link href="text/swriter/01/04090002.xhp" name="format">format</link> specifies the type of information that is displayed as the cross-reference. For example, "Reference" inserts the caption category and caption text of the object.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150535" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3151092" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Close</emph> when finished.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3151115" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">Updating Cross-References</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3153594" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To manually update the cross-references in a document, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Fields</emph> from the menu or press F9.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id7321390" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>View - Field Names</emph> to switch between viewing the reference names and the reference contents.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp#references_modify"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp#hyperlinks"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp#hyperlink_insert"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ebe6ae8b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidereferences_modifyxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Modifying Cross-References</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149291"> + <bookmark_value>references; modifying cross-references</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cross-references; modifying</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;cross-references</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>searching;cross-references</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149291" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="references_modify"><link href="text/swriter/guide/references_modify.xhp" name="Modifying Cross-References">Modifying Cross-References</link></variable></paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153132" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in front of the cross-reference that you want to modify.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3149632" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you cannot see the field shading of the cross-reference, choose <menuitem>View - Field Shadings</menuitem> or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline><keycode>+F8</keycode>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149611" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Edit - Fields</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145101" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the options that you want, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3154255" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">Use the arrow buttons in the <item type="menuitem">Edit Fields</item> dialog to browse through the cross-references in the current document.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/references.xhp#references"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/hyperlinks.xhp#hyperlinks"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..025fb73e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideregistertruexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Printing with Page line-spacing (register-true)</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id4825891"><bookmark_value>rows; register-true text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lines of text; register-true</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>pages;register-true</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs;register-true</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>register-true;pages and paragraphs</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>spacing;register-true text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting;register-true text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10652"><variable id="registertrue"><link href="text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp">Printing with Page line-spacing</link></variable></h1> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id391604248923423"><link href="text/shared/00/00000005.xhp#pageline-spacing" name="page line-spacing"><emph>Page line-spacing</emph></link> printing is particularly useful for documents that will have two pages set next to each other (for example, in a book or brochure), for multi-column layouts, and for documents intended for double-sided printing. + </paragraph> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1065E">To Enable a Document for Page Line-spacing Printing</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10669" role="listitem">Choose <link href="text/shared/01/05040200.xhp" name="formatpage"><menuitem>Format - Page Style - Page</menuitem></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10671" role="listitem">In the <menuitem>Layout Settings</menuitem> section, select the <menuitem>Use page line-spacing</menuitem> checkbox, set the <emph>Reference Style</emph>, and click <menuitem>OK</menuitem>. </paragraph> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id911604247329772">The <emph>Reference Style</emph> sets an invisible vertical (typographical) grid, using the line distance specified in the style. All paragraphs that have Page line-spacing activated will use that line distance, aligning the bottom of a text line to the next grid line, regardless of font size or presence of graphics.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10678" role="listitem">All paragraphs with the selected <emph>Reference Style</emph> (or that inherit the <emph>Reference Style</emph>) will be activated automatically for Page line-spacing.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1067B">To Exempt or Enable Paragraphs for Page Line-spacing Printing</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10685" role="paragraph">Select all the paragraphs you want to exempt, then choose <link href="text/shared/01/05030100.xhp" name="formatparagraph"><menuitem>Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing</menuitem></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10698" role="paragraph"><variable id="exempt">Clear the <emph>Activate page line-spacing</emph> checkbox to exempt paragraphs. Set the checkbox to enable.</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id581604248041562"><variable id="no-effect">The checkbox has no effect, if Page line-spacing is disabled in the Page style</variable>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <h2 id="hd_id791604249131743">To Exempt or Enable Paragraph Styles for Page Line-spacing Printing</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1068C" role="listitem">Open the Styles window (<switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command+T</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>F11</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline>), click the Paragraph Style you want to exempt, right-click that style, choose <emph>Modify</emph>. In the dialog, click the <link href="text/shared/01/05030100.xhp" name="formatparagraph2"><emph>Indents & Spacing</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id481604252645547" role="listitem"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp#exempt"/></paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id911604252806932" role="listitem"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/registertrue.xhp#no-effect"/></paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa51f9af4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideremoving_line_breaksxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Removing Line Breaks</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149687"><bookmark_value>hard returns in pasted text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>line breaks;removing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deleting; line breaks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>copies;removing line breaks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraph marks;removing</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW changed "removing;..." to "deleting;...".</comment><comment>MW changed "paragraph marks;..."</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155916" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="removing_line_breaks"><link href="text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp">Removing Line Breaks</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155858" role="paragraph">Use the AutoCorrect feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153413" role="note">This AutoCorrect feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. </paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153138" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149645" role="listitem">On the <emph>Options</emph> tab, ensure that <emph>Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50%</emph> is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145093" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145118" role="listitem">Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156253" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Apply Style</item> box on the <item type="menuitem">Formatting</item> bar, choose “Default”.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153388" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp#auto_off"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e760da92b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidereset_formatxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Resetting Font Attributes</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149963"><bookmark_value>formats; resetting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>font attributes; resetting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>fonts; resetting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>resetting; fonts</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>direct formatting;exiting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting;exiting direct formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>exiting;direct formatting</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw made "exiting..." a two level entry</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149963" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="reset_format"><link href="text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp" name="Resetting Font Attributes">Resetting Font Attributes</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154091" role="listitem">You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline><keycode>+Shift+X</keycode>. For example, if you have pressed <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline><keycode>+B</keycode> to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline><keycode>+Shift+X</keycode> to return to the default character format of the paragraph.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155854" role="listitem">To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command <emph>Format - Clear Direct Formatting</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp#shortcut_writing"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b49105552 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> + + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguideresize_navigatorxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Docking and Resizing Windows</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2003-10-31T00:00:00">Sun Microsystems, Inc.</created> +</history> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145088"><bookmark_value>Navigator;docking and resizing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>Styles window;docking and resizing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>Gallery;docking and resizing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>docking; Navigator window</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>resizing;windows</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph role="heading" id="hd_id3145088" xml-lang="en-US" level="1"><variable id="resize_navigator"><link href="text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp" name="Docking and Resizing Windows">Docking and Resizing Windows</link> +</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155916" xml-lang="en-US">You can dock, undock and resize most $[officename] program windows such as the Navigator or the Styles window.</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3155861" xml-lang="en-US">To dock or undock the Navigator or the Styles window, hold down the <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline> key and double-click on a gray area in the window. Alternatively, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline><keycode>+Shift+F10</keycode>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3156096" xml-lang="en-US">To resize the window, drag a corner or an edge of the window.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp#autohide"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..643b7276c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguiderulerxhp" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using Rulers</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id8186284"><bookmark_value>rulers;using rulers</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>horizontal rulers</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>vertical rulers</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>indents; setting on rulers</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>page margins on rulers</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>table cells;adjusting the width on rulers</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>showing;rulers</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>hiding;rulers</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>adjusting page margins</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1065F"><variable id="ruler"><link href="text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp">Using Rulers</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1067D" role="paragraph">To show or hide rulers, choose <emph>View - Ruler</emph>. To show the vertical ruler, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</caseinline><defaultinline>Tools - Options</defaultinline></switchinline> - <link href="text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp" name="Writer - View"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME Writer - View</emph></link>, and then select <emph>Vertical ruler</emph> in the <emph>Ruler</emph> area.</paragraph> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149686">Adjusting Page Margins</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155175" role="paragraph">The margins of a page are indicated by the filled areas at the ends of the rulers.</paragraph> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149038">Changing Indents</h2> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153631" role="paragraph">Indents are adjusted with the three small triangles on the horizontal ruler.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145769" role="listitem">To change the first line indent of a selected paragraph, drag the top left triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152776" role="listitem">To change the left or the right paragraph indent, select the paragraph(s) that you want change the indent for, drag the bottom left or the bottom right triangle on the horizontal ruler to a new location.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id91610715353328">For example, to change the left indent starting with the second line of a paragraph, hold down the <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline> key, click the triangle on the bottom left, and drag it to the right</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149164" role="paragraph">You can also double-click anywhere on the horizontal ruler, and adjust the indents in the <link href="text/shared/01/05030000.xhp" name="Paragraph"><emph>Paragraph</emph></link> dialog.</paragraph> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp#table_sizing"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp#tabs"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp#measurement_units"/> + <embed href="text/shared/02/13020000.xhp#setting_margins"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef209ff8e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidesearch_regexpxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using Regular Expressions in Text Searches</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3150099"> + <bookmark_value>searching; with regular expressions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>regular expressions;searching</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>examples for regular expressions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>characters;finding all</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>invisible characters;finding</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraph marks;searching</bookmark_value> + </bookmark> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3150099" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="search_regexp"><link href="text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp">Using Regular Expressions in Text Searches</link></variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0509200916345516" role="paragraph">Regular expressions can be used to search for some unspecified or even invisible characters.</paragraph> + <note id="par_id421554926388821">Searching with regular expressions is different from searching with wildcards. %PRODUCTNAME Writer only supports searching with regular expressions.</note> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155182" role="paragraph">You can use regular expressions when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son".</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155907" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Edit - Find & Replace</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2142399" role="listitem">Click <item type="menuitem">More Options</item> to expand the dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155861" role="listitem">Select the <item type="menuitem">Regular expressions</item> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149843" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Find</item> box, type the search term and the regular expression(s) that you want to use in your search.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156113" role="listitem">Click <item type="menuitem">Find Next</item> or <item type="menuitem">Find All</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153401" role="heading" level="2">Regular Expression Examples</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149641" role="listitem">The regular expression for a single character is a period (.).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153136" role="listitem">The regular expression for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233".</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149609" role="listitem">The regular expression combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149854" role="listitem">The regular expression for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The regular expression character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0509200916345545" role="listitem">The regular expression for a tab character is \t.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153414" role="note">A search using a regular expression will work only within one paragraph. To search using a regular expression in more than one paragraph, do a separate search in each paragraph.</paragraph> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/shared/01/02100001.xhp#02100001"/> + <embed href="text/scalc/guide/wildcards.xhp#wildcards_h1"/> + </section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2c937b8fb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidesection_editxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Editing Sections</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149816"><bookmark_value>sections; editing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>sections;deleting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>deleting;sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>read-only sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>protecting;sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>converting;sections, into normal text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>hiding;sections</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>ufi: added two deleting sections entries</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149816" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="section_edit"><link href="text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp" name="Editing Sections">Editing Sections</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155858" role="paragraph">You can protect, hide, and convert sections to normal text in your document.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154224" role="listitem">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp" name="Format - Sections"><emph>Format - Sections</emph></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149848" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">Section</item> list, click the section you want to modify. You can press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A to select all sections in the list, and you can Shift+click or <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+click to select some sections.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153397" role="listitem">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153120" xml-lang="en-US">To convert a section into normal text, click <emph>Remove</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149631" xml-lang="en-US">To make a section read-only, select the <emph>Protected</emph> check box in the <emph>Write Protection</emph> area.</paragraph> +</listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id731641553483773" role="listitem">Add an optional protection password. The password can be empty and no password will be required to remove protection. If the password is not empty, it will be required to unprotect the section.</paragraph> + </listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149609" xml-lang="en-US">To hide a section, select the <emph>Hide</emph> check box in the <emph>Hide</emph> area.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<comment>removed ordered list with startvalue 4, not sure if such a list will survive all transformations</comment> + + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="hid/modules/swriter/ui/inforeadonlydialog/messagedialog-vbox" id="bm_id661641501152898" localize="false"/> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="hid/modules/swriter/ui/inforeadonlydialog/messagedialog-action_area" id="bm_id661641501152876" localize="false"/> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="hid/modules/swriter/ui/inforeadonlydialog/@@nowidget@@" id="bm_id661641501152125" localize="false"/> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id421641501464020"> + <bookmark_value>Read-only contents;editing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>Protect section;removing</bookmark_value> + </bookmark> + <h2 id="hd_id641641501024846">Editing Read-Only Contents</h2> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id841641501075965">A warning message is displayed if you try to edit protected sections.</paragraph> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id531641501248838">To remove protection of a section, do the following:</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id681641501272982" role="listitem">Choose <link href="text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp" name="Format - Sections"><menuitem>Format - Sections</menuitem></link>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id861641501273184" role="listitem">Select the section to unprotect in the <menuitem>Section</menuitem> area of the dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id221641501273326" role="listitem">Uncheck the <menuitem>Protect</menuitem> option in the <menuitem>Write Protection</menuitem> area of the dialog.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id791641501273494" role="listitem">If the section was protected with a non-empty password, type the password into the dialog that opens.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id561641501273767" role="listitem">Click <menuitem>OK</menuitem> .</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp#sections"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp#section_insert"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156255" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/02170000.xhp" name="Format - Sections">Format - Sections</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id973540" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp">Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME Writer</link></paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..483fe31bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidesection_insertxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Inserting Sections</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149695"> + <bookmark_value>sections; inserting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting; sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>HTML documents;inserting linked sections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>updating;linked sections, manually</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>links;inserting sections</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149695" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="section_insert"><link href="text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp" name="Inserting Sections">Inserting Sections</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155917" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can insert new sections, or links to sections in other documents into the current document. If you insert a section as a link, the content of the link changes when you modify the source document.</paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155863" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a New Section</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149843" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to insert a new section, or select the text that you want to convert to a section.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3156103" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">If you select a text that occurs within a paragraph, the text is automatically converted into a new paragraph.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153404" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">New Section</item> box, type a name for the section.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153127" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the options for the section, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149635" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Insert a Section as a Link</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149648" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Before you can insert a section as link, you must first create sections in the source document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149611" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">When you open a document that contains linked sections, $[officename] prompts you to update the contents of the sections. To manually update a link, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Links</emph>.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149860" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also insert linked sections in HTML documents. When you view the page in a web browser, the content of the sections corresponds to the content of the sections at the time the HTML document was last saved.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145104" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in your document where you want to insert the linked section.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156241" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153363" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">New Section</item> box, type a name for the section.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153387" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Link</item> area, select the <item type="menuitem">Link</item> check box. <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="WIN">Under Windows, you can also select the <item type="menuitem">DDE</item> check box to automatically update the contents of the section when the section in the source document is changed. +</caseinline></switchinline></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154852" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <emph>Browse</emph> button next to the <emph>File name</emph> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155882" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Locate the document containing the section that you want to link to, and then click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149978" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Section</item> box, select the section that you want to insert.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150003" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp#sections"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp#section_edit"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..93cb92f5d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidesectionsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using Sections</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149832"><bookmark_value>multi-column text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; multi-column</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>columns; on text pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text columns</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>sections; columns in/use of</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw changed a typo in "multicolumn"</comment><comment>mw deleted "sections;using" and changed "section;columns in"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149832" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="sections"><link href="text/swriter/guide/sections.xhp" name="Using Sections">Using Sections</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153128" role="paragraph">Sections are named blocks of text, including graphics or objects, that you can use in a number of ways:</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149284" role="listitem">To prevent text from being edited.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149630" role="listitem">To show or hide text.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149647" role="listitem">To reuse text and graphics from other $[officename] documents.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149612" role="listitem">To insert sections of text that uses a different column layout than the current page style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149855" role="paragraph">A section contains at least one paragraph. When you select a text and create a section, a paragraph break is automatically inserted at the end of the text.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149872" role="paragraph">You can insert sections from a text document, or an entire text document as a section into another text document. You can also insert sections from a text document as links in another text document, or in the same document.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153367" role="note">To insert a new paragraph immediately before or after a section, click in front or behind the section, and then press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option +</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Enter.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154242" role="heading" level="2">Sections and Columns</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154255" role="paragraph">You can insert sections into an existing section. For example, you can insert a section containing two columns into a section that contains one column.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154845" role="paragraph">A section layout, for example on the number of columns, has priority over the page layout defined in a page style.</paragraph> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/section_insert.xhp#section_insert"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/section_edit.xhp#section_edit"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155883" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/00/00000005.xhp#dde" name="DDE">DDE</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ddba944b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidesend2htmlxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Saving Text Documents in HTML Format</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145087"> + <bookmark_value>text documents; publishing in HTML</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>HTML documents; creating from text documents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>homepage creation</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>saving;in HTML format</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3145087" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="send2html"><link href="text/swriter/guide/send2html.xhp" name="Saving Text Documents in HTML Format">Saving Text Documents in HTML Format</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149825" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can save a $[officename] Writer document in HTML format, so that you can view it in a web browser. If you want, you can associate a page break with a specific heading paragraph style to generate a separate HTML page each time the style appears in the document. $[officename] Writer automatically creates a page containing hyperlinks to each of these pages.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3155922" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">When you save a text document in HTML format, any graphics in the document are saved into the HTML document as embedded data streams. $[officename] tries to keep the original format of graphics, i.e. JPEG pictures or SVG images will be saved into HTML as such. All other graphic formats are saved as PNG.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155868" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Apply one of the default $[officename] heading paragraph styles, for example, "Heading 1", to the paragraphs where you want to generate a new HTML page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156100" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>File - Send - Create HTML Document</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149281" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Styles</item> box, select the paragraph style that you want to use to generate a new HTML page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153407" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Enter a path and a name for the HTML document, and then click <emph>Save</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a1115f1a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideshortcut_writingxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Applying Text Formatting While You Type</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149689"><bookmark_value>text; formatting bold while typing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting; bold, while typing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>keyboard;bold formatting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>bold;formatting while typing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>shortcut keys;bold formatting</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149689" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="shortcut_writing"><link href="text/swriter/guide/shortcut_writing.xhp" name="Applying Text Formatting While You Type">Applying Text Formatting While You Type</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155909" role="paragraph">To apply bold formatting</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155861" role="listitem">Select the text that you want to format.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149836" role="listitem">Press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+B.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156112" role="listitem">You can also press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+B, type the text that you want to format in bold, and then press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+B when you are finished.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3151909" role="paragraph">To apply italic formatting</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151861" role="listitem">Select the text that you want to format.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3141836" role="listitem">Press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+I.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151112" role="listitem">You can also press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+I, type the text that you want to format in italic, and then press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+I when you are finished.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3152909" role="paragraph">To underline text</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152861" role="listitem">Select the text that you want to underline.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3142836" role="listitem">Press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+U.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3152112" role="listitem">You can also press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+U, type the text that you want underlined, and then press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+U when you are finished.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp#subscript"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149648" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp" name="Keyboard shortcut for text documents">Keyboard shortcut for text documents</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149611" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/main0400.xhp" name="Keyboard shortcut in $[officename]">Keyboard shortcut in $[officename]</link></paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26a5b0d50 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidesmarttagsxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using Smart Tags</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155622"><bookmark_value>smart tags</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>AutoCorrect function; smart tags</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>options;smart tags</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>disabling;smart tags</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>installing;smart tags</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW moved 2 index entries from shared/01/06040700.xhp, inverted "smart tags;options", made "smart tags;" a one level entry and added 2 entries</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3563951" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="smarttags"><link href="text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp">Using Smart Tags</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id368358" role="paragraph">Smart Tags provide additional information and functionality to specified words in a Writer document. The available features can be different for different Smart Tags extensions.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id9298379" role="heading" level="2">Installing Smart Tags</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1827448" role="paragraph">Smart Tags can be supplied as <link href="text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp">extensions</link> to %PRODUCTNAME Writer. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2508621" role="paragraph">To install a Smart Tag, do one of the following:</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3856013" role="paragraph">Save the *.oxt extension file to your harddrive, then double-click the *.oxt file in your file manager. Alternatively, in %PRODUCTNAME choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - Extension Manager</item> to open the Extension Manager, click Add and browse to the file.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7814264" role="paragraph">Click a Smart Tag *.oxt file link on a web page and open the link with the default application. This requires a properly configured Web browser.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id8142338" role="heading" level="2">Smart Tags Menu</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1917477" role="paragraph">Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><item type="menuitem">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</item></caseinline><defaultinline><item type="menuitem">Tools - Options</item></defaultinline></switchinline><item type="menuitem"> - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id192266" role="paragraph">When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline>-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by <keycode>Shift+F10</keycode>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1998962" role="paragraph">In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The <item type="menuitem">Smart Tags Options</item> command opens the <link href="text/shared/01/06040700.xhp">Smart Tags</link> page of Tools - Autocorrect Options.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id2376476" role="heading" level="2">To Enable and Disable Smart Tags</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id349131" role="paragraph">When you have installed at least one Smart Tags extension, you see the <link href="text/shared/01/06040700.xhp">Smart Tags</link> page in <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options</item>. Use this dialog to enable or disable Smart Tags and to manage the installed tags.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1216467" role="note">Text that is recognized as a Smart Tag is not checked by the automatic spellcheck.</paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1d0026834 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidespellcheck_dialogxml" indexer="include"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Checking Spelling and Grammar</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149684"> + <bookmark_value>spellcheck; checking text documents manually</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>checking spelling;manually</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>grammar checker</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149684" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="spellcheck_dialog"><link href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp" name="Checking Spelling and Grammar">Checking Spelling and Grammar</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149814" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can manually check the spelling and grammar of a text selection or the entire document.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id0525200902184476" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">To check the spelling and the grammar of a text, the appropriate dictionaries must be installed. For many languages three different dictionaries exist: a spellchecker, a hyphenation dictionary, and a thesaurus. Each dictionary covers one language only. Grammar checkers can be downloaded and installed as extensions. See the <link href="https://extensions.libreoffice.org/extension-center?getCategories=Dictionary">extensions web page</link>.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149828" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position, or at the beginning of the text selection.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155859" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document, or select the text that you want to check.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149836" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Tools - Spelling</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156104" role="listitem">When a possible spelling error is encountered, the <item type="menuitem">Spelling</item> dialog opens and $[officename] offers some suggested corrections.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149861" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3145099" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To accept a correction, click the suggestion, and then click <emph>Correct</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3156241" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Edit the sentence in the upper text box, and then click <emph>Correct</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3155886" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To add the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary, click <emph>Add to Dictionary</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp#auto_spellcheck"/><comment>removed a line</comment> +<paragraph id="par_id3147107" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/01/06010000.xhp" name="Spelling">Spelling dialog</link></paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp#using_hyphen"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp#using_thesaurus"/> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11654e207 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidestylist_fillformatxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145084"><bookmark_value>fill format mode</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>copying; styles, by fill format mode</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>brush for copying styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>styles; transferring</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formats; copying and pasting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text formats; copying and pasting</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw changed "copying;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145084" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="stylist_fillformat"><link href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp" name="Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode">Applying Styles in Fill Format Mode</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155855" role="paragraph">You can quickly apply styles, such as paragraph and character styles, in your document by using the Fill Format Mode in the Styles window.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156114" role="listitem">Choose <emph>View - Styles</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153128" role="listitem">Click the icon of the style category that you want to apply.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145090" role="listitem">Click the style, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Fill Format Mode</item> icon +<image id="img_id3149644" src="cmd/sc_fillstyle.png" width="0.1665in" height="0.1665in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3149644">Icon</alt> + </image> in the <item type="menuitem">Styles</item> window.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153371" role="listitem">Move the mouse pointer to where you want to apply the style in the document, and click. To apply the style to more than one item, drag to select the items, and then release.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154263" role="listitem">Press <item type="keycode">Esc</item> when finished.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2227852" role="paragraph" localize="false"> +<embedvar href="text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp#formatpaintbrush"/> +</paragraph> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#stylist_fromselect"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp#stylist_update"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3159259" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp" name="Styles">Styles</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2bbd4a6b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidestylist_fromselectxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Creating New Styles From Selections</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"> + <bookmark_value>styles; creating from selections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>drag and drop;creating new styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>copying;styles, from selections</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw deleted "creating;" and added "copying;"</comment> + +<h1 id="hd_id3155911" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="stylist_fromselect"><link href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp" name="Creating New Styles From Selections">Creating New Styles From Selections</link></variable></h1> + +<h2 id="par_id3149829" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a New Style From a Manually Formatted Selection</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156097" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="open_sidebar">Choose <menuitem>View - Styles</menuitem> to open the <emph>Styles</emph> deck in the Sidebar.</variable></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153402" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="select_category">Click the icon at the top of the <emph>Styles</emph> deck for the style category of the new style.</variable></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153119" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click in the document where you want to copy the style from, for example, in a paragraph to which you applied manual formatting.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153138" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click the <menuitem>Style actions</menuitem> menu icon at the top right corner of the <emph>Styles</emph> deck and choose <menuitem>New Style from Selection</menuitem> from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156260" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="enter_name">Enter a name for the new style in the <menuitem>New Style from Selection</menuitem> dialog box.</variable></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154411" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<table id="tab_id11608476870069"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id761608476870069"> +<image src="cmd/sc_stylenewbyexample.png" id="img_id591608476870069" width="1cm" height="1cm"><alt id="alt_id41608476870069">Icon New Style from Selection</alt></image> + </paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id141608476870069" role="paragraph">Styles actions menu icon</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> +</table> + + +<h2 id="hd_id3153373" xml-lang="en-US">To Create a New Style by Drag-And-Drop</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154233" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#open_sidebar"/></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154258" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#select_category"/></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154851" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">For paragraph, character and list styles, select at least one character in the style that you want to copy, then drag the selection to the <emph>Styles</emph> deck and release. For <literal>frame</literal> styles, select the frame and hold the mouse button pressed until the mouse icon changes, then drag to the <emph>Styles</emph> deck and release.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_idN107B2" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop the selection onto the respective icon at the top of the Styles deck. You do not need to open that style category in advance.</paragraph> +</listitem> + +<listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id131608474670601" role="listitem" localize="false"><embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#enter_name"/></paragraph> +</listitem> + +</list> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id331608474971283">For page and table styles, you must use the <menuitem>Styles actions</menuitem> menu at the top right corner of the Styles deck. The drag-and-drop method is not possible with these styles.</paragraph> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<paragraph id="par_id3149988" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp" name="Styles">Styles (Sidebar)</link></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id301608479105670"><link href="text/shared/01/05140100.xhp" name="New Style from Selection"><menuitem>Styles - New Style from Selection</menuitem></link></paragraph> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp#stylist_update"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp#stylist_fillformat"/> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..600c80e90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidestylist_updatexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Updating Styles From Selections</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155915"><bookmark_value>Stylist, see Styles window</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>styles; updating from selections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>templates; updating from selections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>Styles window; updating from selections</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>updating; styles, from selections</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155915"><variable id="stylist_update"><link href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp" name="Updating Styles From Selections">Updating Styles From Selections</link> +</variable></h1> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149838" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>View - Styles</menuitem> or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command+T</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>F11</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156107" role="listitem">Click the icon of the style category that you want to update.<comment>UFI: use "category" for consistent wording, see #i21144#</comment></paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149283" role="listitem">In the document, click from where you want to copy the updated style. For example, click a paragraph to which you applied some manual formatting that you want to copy now.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153402" role="listitem">In the Styles window, click the style that you want to update.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153119" role="listitem">Click the arrow next to the <emph>Style actions</emph> icon and choose <menuitem>Update Selected Style</menuitem> from the submenu.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <note xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id0310200910360780">Only the manually formatted attributes of the text at the cursor position in the document will be added to the style that is selected in the Styles window. Any attributes that were applied as part of a style will not be added to the updated style.</note> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp#stylist_fillformat"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#stylist_fromselect"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155498" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp" name="Styles">Styles</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..505b5f8a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidesubscriptxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Making Text Superscript or Subscript</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155174"><bookmark_value>text; subscript and superscript</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>superscript text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>subscript text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>characters;subscript and superscript</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155174" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="subscript"><link href="text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp" name="Making Text Superscript or Subscript">Making Text Superscript or Subscript</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155917" role="listitem">Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155865" role="listitem">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <comment>somehow the following list disappeared, see issue 112471, and this remained: (list type="unordered"/) (replaced brackets) </comment> + +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149829" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Character - Position</emph>, and then select <emph>Superscript</emph> or <emph>Subscript</emph>.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3156111" xml-lang="en-US">Press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Shift+B to make the text subscript.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3149205" xml-lang="en-US">In the <menuitem>Properties</menuitem> deck of the sidebar, go to the <menuitem>Character</menuitem> area and click the <menuitem>Superscript</menuitem> or <menuitem>Subscript</menuitem> buttons.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> + + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153416" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/05020500.xhp" name="Format - Character - Position">Format - Character - Position</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154705" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/06040200.xhp" name="Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace">Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace</link></paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5afd032cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetable_cellmergexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Merging and Splitting Cells</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147240"><bookmark_value>cells; merging/splitting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables; merging cells</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cell merges</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>splitting cells;by menu command</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>merging;cells</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw made "cell merges;" a one level entry</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6618243" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="table_cellmerge"><link href="text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp" name="Merging and Splitting Cells">Merging and Splitting Cells</link> +</variable><comment>mw created this file out of the shared guide "table_cellmerge.xhp", see also bug #63021</comment></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1211890" role="paragraph">You can select adjacent cells, then merge them into a single cell. Conversely, you can take a large cell and divide it into individual cells.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3463850" role="heading" level="2">To Merge Cells</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5708792" role="listitem">Select the adjacent cells.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6301461" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Table - Merge Cells</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id9156468" role="heading" level="2">To Split Cells</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3415936" role="listitem">Place the cursor in the cell to be split.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4044312" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Table - Split Cells</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id634174" role="listitem">A dialog allows you to split the cell into two or more cells, horizontally or vertically.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..412f0595b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetable_deletexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149489"><bookmark_value>deleting; tables or table contents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables; deleting</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149489" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="table_delete"><link href="text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp" name="Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table">Deleting Tables or the Contents of a Table</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155918" role="paragraph">You can delete a table from your document, or delete the contents of the table.</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155863" role="paragraph">To delete a whole table, click in the table, and then choose <emph>Table - Delete - Table</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153415" role="paragraph">To delete the contents of a table, click in the table, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A <comment>UFI: Ctrl+A once is not enough</comment>until all cells are selected, and then press Delete or Backspace.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp#table_insert"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4631a1f1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetable_insertxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting Tables</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3156377"><bookmark_value>tables; inserting text tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting; tables in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>DDE; inserting tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>OLE objects; inserting tables in</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>cells;inserting from spreadsheets</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>tables in spreadsheets;inserting in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>spreadsheets;inserting tables from</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw changed "cell ranges;" to "cells;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156377" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="table_insert"><link href="text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp" name="Inserting Tables">Inserting Tables</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149489" role="paragraph">There are several ways to create a table in a text document. You can insert a table from a toolbar, through a menu command, or from a spreadsheet. <comment>UFI: from a database?</comment></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155908" role="heading" level="2">To Insert a Table From a Toolbar</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155861" role="listitem">Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147416" role="listitem">On the <emph>Standard</emph> or the <emph>Insert</emph> bar, click the arrow next to the <emph>Table</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153398" role="listitem">In the table grid, drag to select the numbers of rows and columns that you want, and then release.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153416" role="paragraph">To cancel, drag to the other side until <emph>Cancel</emph> appears in the preview area of the grid.<comment>make it RTL compliant</comment></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153135" role="heading" level="2">To Insert a Table With a Menu Command</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149642" role="listitem">Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the table.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149609" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Table - Insert Table</emph>. </paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149858" role="listitem">In the <emph>Size</emph> area, enter the number of rows and columns.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145097" role="listitem">Select the options that you want, click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149572" role="heading" level="2">To Insert a Table From a Calc Spreadsheet</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149594" role="listitem">Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156250" role="listitem">In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154395" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Edit - Copy</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154420" role="listitem">In your text document, do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + + + +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3153383" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Edit - Paste</emph>. The cell range is pasted as an OLE object. To edit the contents of the cells, double-click the object.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id3154248" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Edit - Paste Special</emph>, and choose from the following options:</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> + + + + <table id="tbl_id3152755"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154844" role="tablehead">Options</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154867" role="tablehead">Is inserted as...</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155893" role="tablecontent">$[officename] $[officeversion] Spreadsheet</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149986" role="tablecontent">OLE object - as with <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+V or drag-and-drop</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148674" role="tablecontent">GDIMetaFile</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148697" role="tablecontent">Graphic</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153027" role="tablecontent">Bitmap</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148957" role="tablecontent">Graphic</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147104" role="tablecontent">HTML</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147126" role="tablecontent">HTML table</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150223" role="tablecontent">Unformatted text</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150246" role="tablecontent">Text only, tab stops as separators</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145227" role="tablecontent">Formatted text [RTF]</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150938" role="tablecontent">Text table</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150965" role="tablecontent"><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="WIN">DDE link (only under Windows) +</caseinline></switchinline></paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154377" role="tablecontent"><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="WIN">Table structure and contents, without formatting. With updating +</caseinline></switchinline></paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + </table> + + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3151093" role="heading" level="3">Drag-and-Drop a Cell Range From a Calc Spreadsheet</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151116" role="listitem">Open the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet containing the cell range that you want to insert.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150515" role="listitem">In the spreadsheet, drag to select the cells.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150534" role="listitem">Click and hold the mouse button in the selected cells.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147527" role="listitem">Drag the selected cells into the text document.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp#table_select"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_delete.xhp#table_delete"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/borders.xhp#borders"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3e30c0a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetable_repeat_multiple_headersxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Repeating a Table Header on a New Page</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155870"> + <bookmark_value>tables; heading repetition after page breaks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>repeating; table headings after page breaks</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>headings; repeating in tables</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>multi-page tables</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>MW made "table heading repetition..." a two level entry and changed "headers;" to "headings:"</comment><comment>mw added "multi-page tables"</comment> +<paragraph id="par_id3155870" role="paragraph" localize="false" xml-lang="en-US"/> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3153406" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="table_repeat_multiple_headers"><link href="text/swriter/guide/table_repeat_multiple_headers.xhp" name="Repeating a Table Header on a New Page">Repeating a Table Heading on a New Page</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3149636" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can repeat a table heading on each new page that the table spans.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145098" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Table - Insert Table</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156240" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the <item type="menuitem">Heading</item> and the <item type="menuitem">Repeat heading rows on new pages</item> check boxes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153376" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the number of rows and columns for the table.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153393" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp#tablemode"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp#table_sizing"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3cfb07023 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> + + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidetable_selectxhp" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> +<title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Selecting Tables, Rows, and Columns</title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp</filename> +</topic> +<history> +<created date="2004-09-27T15:16:47">UFI: Selecting tables</created> +</history> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id7693411"><bookmark_value>selecting;tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>tables;selecting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>columns;selecting</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>rows;selecting</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph role="heading" id="par_idN105F0" xml-lang="en-US" level="1"><variable id="table_select"><link href="text/swriter/guide/table_select.xhp">Selecting Tables, Rows, and Columns</link> +</variable></paragraph> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN1060E" xml-lang="en-US">You can select a table in a text document with a keyboard or with a mouse.</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10614" xml-lang="en-US">To select a table with the keyboard, move the cursor into the table, and then press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A until all the cells are selected.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10633" xml-lang="en-US">To select a table with the mouse, move the mouse pointer to a position just above and left of the table. The mouse pointer becomes a diagonal arrow. Click to select the table.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_idN10637" xml-lang="en-US">To select a row or column with the mouse, point to a position just left of the row or above the column. The mouse pointer becomes an arrow. Click to select the row or column.</paragraph> +</listitem> +</list> +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_insert.xhp#table_insert"/> +</section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..838de6e43 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> +<topic id="textswriterguidetable_sizingxml" indexer="include"> +<title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table </title> +<filename>/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp</filename> +</topic> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3156108"> +<bookmark_value>cells; enlarging and reducing in text tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>table cells; enlarging/reducing in text</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>keyboard; resizing rows/columns</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>resizing;rows and columns in text tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>enlarging columns,cells and table rows</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>reducing rows and columns in text tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>tables; resizing/juxtaposing</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>juxtaposing tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>heights of table rows</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>widths of table columns</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>rows;resizing in tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>columns;resizing in tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>column widths in tables</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "text tables;enlarging cells", "tables;changing the size", "tables;arranging" and "arranging;tables". MW changed "tables;sizing" and "table cells;". MW added "reducing rows and columns in text tables"</comment><comment>MW changed "tables;" and added "juxtaposing tables"</comment><comment>MW added 5 index entries wrt column widths and row heights</comment> +<h1 id="hd_id3156108" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="table_sizing"><link href="text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp" name="Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table">Resizing Rows and Columns in a Text Table</link></variable></h1> +<paragraph id="par_id3153140" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can resize the width of table cells and columns, as well as change the height of table rows.</paragraph> +<table id="tbl_id3149640"> +<tablerow> +<tablecell> +<paragraph id="par_id3149615" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"> +<image id="img_id3149622" src="cmd/sc_optimizetable.png" width="1cm" height="1cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3149622">Icon</alt> + </image></paragraph> +</tablecell> +<tablecell> +<paragraph id="par_id3146497" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can also distribute rows and columns evenly using the icons on the <item type="menuitem">Optimize Size</item> toolbar on the <item type="menuitem">Table</item> Bar.</paragraph> +</tablecell> +</tablerow> +</table> + +<h2 id="hd_id3145109" xml-lang="en-US">Changing the Width of Columns and Cells</h2> +<h3 id="hd_id3149574" xml-lang="en-US">To Change the Width of a Column</h3> +<paragraph id="par_id3149587" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Do one of the following:</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph id="par_id3156246" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph id="par_id3145390" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Rest the mouse pointer over the column dividing line on the ruler until the pointer becomes a separator icon, and then drag the line to a new location.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph id="par_id0918200811260957" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline> and then click and drag a line to scale all cells right or above the line proportionally.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph id="par_id3145411" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Place the cursor in a cell in the column, hold down the <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option +</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline> key, and then press the left or the right arrow key.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph id="par_id3153364" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To increase the distance from the left edge of the page to the edge of the table, hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option +</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>+Shift, and then press the right arrow key.</paragraph> +</listitem></list> +<paragraph id="par_id3155891" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table</emph>, and selecting the options that you want in the <emph>Keyboard handling</emph> area.</paragraph> +<h3 id="hd_id3149993" xml-lang="en-US">To Change the Width of a Cell</h3> +<paragraph id="par_id3148676" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Hold down <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option+Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt+Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>, and then press the left or the right arrow key</paragraph> +<h2 id="hd_id3153014" xml-lang="en-US">Changing the Height of a Row</h2> +<paragraph id="par_id3153035" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the height of a row, place the cursor in a cell in the row, hold down the <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Option</caseinline><defaultinline>Alt</defaultinline></switchinline> key, and then press the up or the down arrow key.</paragraph> +<h2 id="hd_id8478041" xml-lang="en-US">Resizing a Whole Table</h2> +<paragraph id="par_id3358867" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To change the width and height of a table, do one of the following:</paragraph> +<list type="unordered"> +<listitem> +<paragraph id="par_id5366679" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Click inside the table. In the rulers, drag the border between the white and the gray area to resize the table.</paragraph> +</listitem> +<listitem> +<paragraph id="par_id1279030" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">Click inside the table. Choose <item type="menuitem">Table - Properties</item> to open a dialog and set the properties to the numbers.</paragraph> +</listitem></list> +<paragraph id="par_id5009308" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">To wrap text to the sides of a table, and to arrange two tables next to another, you must insert the tables into a frame. Click inside the table, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+A twice to select the whole table, then choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id4190496" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">Tables within HTML pages do not offer the full range of properties and commands as tables in OpenDocument format.</paragraph><embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/><embed href="text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp#tablemode"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp#table_cellmerge"/><embed href="text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp#ruler"/> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bfadc1b0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetablemodexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155856"><bookmark_value>table mode selection</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>proportional distribution of tables</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>relative distribution of table cells</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>tables; adapting the width by keyboard</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>cells; adapting the width by keyboard</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>keyboard;modifying the behavior of rows/columns</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>behavior of rows/columns</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155856" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="tablemode"><link href="text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp" name="Modifying the Behavior of Rows and Columns for Table">Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard</link></variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149835" role="paragraph">When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the <item type="menuitem">Behavior of rows/columns</item> options determine how the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table with fixed row and column dimensions if space permits.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7344279" role="note">Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.<comment>UFI: fixes bugtraq 4971582</comment></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156110" role="paragraph">To set the <item type="menuitem">Behavior of rows/columns</item> options for tables in text documents, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><item type="menuitem">%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</item></caseinline><defaultinline><item type="menuitem">Tools - Options</item></defaultinline></switchinline><item type="menuitem"> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table</item>. There are three display modes for tables:</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149638" role="listitem"><emph>Fixed</emph> - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149613" role="listitem"><emph>Fixed, proportional</emph> - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149864" role="listitem"><emph>Variable</emph> - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp#table_sizing"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/table_cellmerge.xhp#table_cellmerge"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7385cfbb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetemplates_stylesxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Templates and Styles</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3153396"><bookmark_value>formatting styles; styles and templates</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>styles; styles and templates</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>organizing; templates (guide)</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>templates; organizing (guide)</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153396"><variable id="templates_styles"><link href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp" name="Templates and Styles">Templates and Styles</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149635" role="paragraph">A template is a document that contains specific formatting styles, graphics, tables, objects, and other information. A template is used as the basis for creating other documents. For example, you can define paragraph and character styles in a document, save the document as a template, and then use the template to create a new document with the same styles.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149957" role="paragraph">Unless you specify otherwise, every new $[officename] text document is based on the default template.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149974" role="paragraph">$[officename] has a number of predefined templates that you can use to create different types of text documents, such as business letters.</paragraph> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp#load_styles"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/change_header.xhp#change_header"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fillformat.xhp#stylist_fillformat"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/stylist_fromselect.xhp#stylist_fromselect"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp#standard_template"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp#manage_templates"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..84dc222a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_animationxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Animating Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3151182"> + <bookmark_value>text animation</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>effects; text animation</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>animations;text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<comment>mw made "animating text" a two level entry</comment> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3151182" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="text_animation"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_animation.xhp" name="Animating Text">Animating Text</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145080" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can only animate text that is contained in a drawing object, such as rectangles, lines, or text objects. For example, draw a rectangle, then double-click the rectangle and enter your text.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149811" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the drawing object containing the text that you want to animate.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155178" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Object - Text Attributes</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Text Animation</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149819" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Effect</item> box, select the animation that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145786" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the properties of the effect, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e95968718 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_capitalxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Changing the Case of Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155182"><bookmark_value>characters; uppercase or lowercase</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; uppercase or lowercase</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lowercase letters; text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>uppercase; formatting text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>capital letters;changing to small letters</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>changing;cases of text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>initial capitals in titles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>small capitals (guide)</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW added "small capitals"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155182" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="text_capital"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp" name="Changing the Case of Text">Changing the Case of Text</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155916" role="paragraph">You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10728" role="note">When you apply formatting to your text by <emph>Format - Character</emph>, the text stays the same, it is only displayed in another way. On the other hand, when you choose <emph>Format - Text</emph> or <emph>Format - Text - Change Case</emph>, the text is permanently changed.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155861" role="heading" level="2">To Capitalize Text</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147420" role="listitem">Select the text that you want to capitalize.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149841" role="listitem">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1120200910485778" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Text - Uppercase</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1120200910485775" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Character</item>, click the Font Effects tab, then select the type of capitalization in the Effects box. "Capitals" capitalizes all letters. "Title" capitalizes the first letter of each word. "Small capitals" capitalizes all letters, but in a reduced font size.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149644" role="heading" level="2">To Change Text to Lowercase</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149964" role="listitem">Select the text that you want to change to lowercase.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149606" role="listitem">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id112020091049000" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Text - Lowercase</item>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1120200910490034" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Character</item>, click the Font Effects tab, then select "Lowercase" in the Effects box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3d93590b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_centervertxml" indexer="include"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155177"> + <bookmark_value>frames; centering on pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>centering;frames on pages</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>title pages; centering text on</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155177" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="text_centervert"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp" name="Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page">Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page</link></variable></paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155920" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the text that you want to center on the page.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155868" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3152765" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Anchor</item> area, select <item type="menuitem">To page</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149844" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Size</item> area, set the dimensions of the frame.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3156114" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">In the <item type="menuitem">Position</item> area, select "Center" in the <item type="menuitem">Horizontal</item> and <item type="menuitem">Vertical</item> boxes.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153410" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3149615" role="note" xml-lang="en-US">To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Frame and Object - Properties</item>. Click the <item type="menuitem">Borders</item> tab, and then click in the <item type="menuitem">Set No Border</item> box in the <item type="menuitem">Line Arrangement</item> area.</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3145098" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame.</paragraph> +<embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c91cbb451 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_direct_cursorxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Using the Direct Cursor</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> +<body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155178"><bookmark_value>text; cursor</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>entering text with direct cursor</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>direct cursor; settings</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>writing with direct cursor</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>cursor;direct cursor</bookmark_value> +<bookmark_value>settings;direct cursor</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155178"><variable id="text_direct_cursor"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp" name="Using the Direct Cursor">Using the Direct Cursor</link></variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155908" role="paragraph">The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155921" role="paragraph">To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids</emph>.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106A3" role="listitem">On the <menuitem>Tools</menuitem> bar, click the <menuitem>Direct Cursor</menuitem> icon +<image id="img_id3149846" src="cmd/sc_shadowcursor.png" width="1cm" height="1cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3149846">Icon</alt></image>. Alternatively, enable <emph>Direct Cursor</emph> by going to <menuitem>Edit - Direct Cursor Mode</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106C5" role="listitem">Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type:</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + + <table id="tab_id151637758600046"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id561637758600046"> +<image src="media/helpimg/dircursleft.png" id="img_id961637758600046" width="1cm" height="1cm"><alt id="alt_id311637758600046">Align left</alt></image> + </paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id321637758600046" role="paragraph">Align left</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id561637758600047"> +<image src="media/helpimg/dircurscent.png" id="img_id961637758600047" width="1cm" height="1cm"><alt id="alt_id311637758600047">Centered</alt></image> + </paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id321637758600047" role="paragraph">Centered</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id561637758600048"> +<image src="media/helpimg/dircursright.png" id="img_id961637758600048" width="1cm" height="1cm"><alt id="alt_id311637758600048">Align right</alt></image> + </paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph id="par_id321637758600048" role="paragraph">Align right</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + </table> + + <list type="ordered" startwith="3"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1071D" role="listitem">Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/templates_styles.xhp#templates_styles"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp#standard_template"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82f79284c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_emphasizexml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Emphasizing Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149820"><bookmark_value>text; emphasizing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>emphasizing text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149820" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="text_emphasize"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp" name="Emphasizing Text">Emphasizing Text</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155922" role="paragraph">Here are a few examples of how to emphasize text in a document:</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147412" role="listitem">Select the text and apply a different font style or effect, such as <emph>bold</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149840" role="listitem">Right-click in a paragraph, choose <emph>Paragraph, </emph>set the options that you want, for example, the background color, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150084" role="listitem">Select the text, and then choose <item type="menuitem">Insert - Frame</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id6924649" role="paragraph">Use the Text tool on the Drawing toolbar. </paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106E7" role="paragraph">Use Fontwork. To open the Fontwork window, click the Fontwork Gallery icon on the Drawing bar.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp#fontwork"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f48e81f51 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_framexml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting, Editing, and Linking Frames</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149487"><bookmark_value>frames; inserting/editing/linking</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editing;frames</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;frames</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>resizing;frames, by mouse</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>scaling; frames, by mouse</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>links;frames</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text flow; from frame to frame</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>frames; linking</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>printing;hiding frames from printing</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "text;" and changed "printing;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149487" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="text_frame"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp" name="Inserting, Editing, and Linking Frames">Inserting, Editing, and Linking Frames</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149842" role="paragraph">A frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156104" role="heading" level="2">To Insert a Frame</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149961" role="listitem">Select the text that you want to include in the frame.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149602" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Insert - Frame</emph>, and click OK.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145115" role="heading" level="2">To Edit a Frame</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149578" role="listitem">To edit the contents of a frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156239" role="listitem">To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose <emph>Frame</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156261" role="listitem">To resize a frame, click an edge of the frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3153386" role="heading" level="2">To Hide Text From Printing</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154262" role="paragraph">Any Writer frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154858" role="listitem">Select the frame (you see the eight handles).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155875" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Options</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155899" role="listitem">In the <emph>Properties</emph> area, unmark the <emph>Print</emph> check box and click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3148701" role="heading" level="2">To Link Frames</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149986" role="paragraph">You can link Writer frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153025" role="listitem">Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150223" role="listitem">On the <item type="menuitem">Frame</item> Bar, click the <item type="menuitem">Link Frames</item> icon +<image id="img_id3148968" src="cmd/sc_chainframes.png" width="0.222in" height="0.222in"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3148968">Icon</alt> + </image>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150930" role="listitem">Click the frame that you want to link to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150947" role="paragraph">You can only link frames if:</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150969" role="listitem">The target frame is empty.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154365" role="listitem">The target frame is not linked to another frame.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154383" role="listitem">The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145559" role="listitem">The source frame does not have a next link.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145577" role="listitem">The target or the source frame are not contained in each other.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3151083" role="paragraph">When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5853144" role="note">The AutoSize feature is available only for the last frame in a chain of linked frames.</paragraph><comment>UFI: removed +id="par_id3147542" You can only change the height of the last frame in a series of linked frames. +Obviously this works now</comment> +<section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp#text_centervert"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp#textdoc_inframe"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp#floating_toolbar"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8af8c9511 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_nav_keybxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3159260"><bookmark_value>text; navigating and selecting with keyboard</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>navigating; in text, with keyboard</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>selecting;text, with keyboard</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>keyboard; navigating and selecting in text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3159260" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="text_nav_keyb"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp" name="Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard">Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155179" role="paragraph">You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard.</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1031200810571916" role="listitem">To move the cursor, press the key or key combination given in the following table.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1031200810571929" role="listitem">To select the characters under the moving cursor, additionally hold down the Shift key when you move the cursor.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <table id="tbl_id3149487"> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155918" role="tablehead">Key</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155870" role="tablehead">Function</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156220" role="tablehead"> + <emph>+</emph><switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>Command key</emph> +</caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Ctrl key</emph></defaultinline></switchinline></paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156113" role="tablecontent">Right, left arrow keys</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150105" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153418" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149629" role="tablecontent">Up, down arrow keys</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149949" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor up or down one line.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149972" role="tablecontent">(<switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command+Option +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl+Alt</defaultinline></switchinline>) Moves the current paragraph up or down.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149624" role="tablecontent">Home</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149871" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145108" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149586" role="tablecontent">Home</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156237" role="tablecontent">In a table</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156260" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145409" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154410" role="tablecontent">End</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153372" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor to the end of the current line.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154235" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor to the end of the document</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154262" role="tablecontent">End</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154850" role="tablecontent">In a table</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154873" role="tablecontent">Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155894" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155944" role="tablecontent">PgUp</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148678" role="tablecontent">Scrolls up one page.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148701" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor to the header.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + <tablerow> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149998" role="tablecontent">PgDn</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153018" role="tablecontent">Scroll down one page.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + <tablecell> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148949" role="tablecontent">Moves the cursor to the footer.</paragraph> + </tablecell> + </tablerow> + </table> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp#text_keys"/> + <embed href="text/shared/04/01010000.xhp#common_keys"/> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id921513466017508" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/02/20050000.xhp" name="Selection modes">Selection Modes</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9da6f39ca --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetext_rotatexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Rotating Text</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155911"> + <bookmark_value>text; rotating</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>rotating;text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3155911" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="text_rotate"><link href="text/swriter/guide/text_rotate.xhp" name="Rotating Text">Rotating Text</link></variable></paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3147410" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can only rotate text that is contained in a drawing object.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153130" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <item type="menuitem">View - Toolbars- Drawing</item> to open the <item type="menuitem">Drawing</item> toolbar.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149866" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the <link href="text/shared/02/01140000.xhp" name="Text"><item type="menuitem">Text</item></link> icon <image id="img_id3149600" src="cmd/sc_texttoolbox.png" width="0.564cm" height="0.564cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3149600">Icon</alt></image>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149590" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Drag in your document to draw the text object, and then type your text.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154415" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click outside of the object, then click the text you entered. Click the <link href="text/shared/02/05090000.xhp" name="Object Rotation Mode"><item type="menuitem">Rotate</item></link> icon <image id="img_id3145405" src="cmd/sc_toggleobjectrotatemode.png" width="0.564cm" height="0.564cm"><alt xml-lang="en-US" id="alt_id3145405">Icon</alt></image> on the <item type="menuitem">Drawing Object Properties</item> toolbar.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154252" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Drag one of the corner handles of the text object.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<paragraph id="par_id3154844" role="tip" xml-lang="en-US">You can also right-click the text object, choose <emph>Position and Size</emph>, click the <emph>Rotation</emph> tab, and then enter a rotation angle or a new position for the object.</paragraph> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_emphasize.xhp#text_emphasize"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3155888" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/shared/02/01140000.xhp" name="Show Draw Functions">Show Draw Functions</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..638ba62cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidetextdoc_inframexml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Inserting an Entire Text Document</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155185"><bookmark_value>sections;inserting external content</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text documents;merging</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>links;inserting text documents as</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;text documents</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw deleted "text;"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155185" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="textdoc_inframe"><link href="text/swriter/guide/textdoc_inframe.xhp" name="Inserting an Entire Text Document">Inserting an Entire Text Document</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id1812799" role="heading" level="2">To Insert a Text File</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155855" role="listitem">Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147412" role="listitem">Choose <menuitem>Insert - Text from File</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149839" role="listitem">Locate the text document that you want to insert, and then click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148858" role="paragraph">The contents of the text document are embedded into the current document and are not updated if the source file is changed. If you want the contents to automatically update when you change the source document, insert the file as a link.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3156105" role="heading" level="2">To Insert an Entire Text Document as a Link</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150096" role="listitem">Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert the file.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153404" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Insert - Section</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153127" role="listitem">Type a name in the <emph>New Section</emph> box, and then select the <emph>Link</emph> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149642" role="listitem">In the <item type="menuitem">File Name</item> box, type the name of the file that you want to insert, or click the <item type="menuitem">Browse</item> button and locate the file.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149968" role="listitem">If the target text document contains sections, you can select the section that you want to insert in the + <item type="menuitem">Sections</item> box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149619" role="listitem">If you want, set the formatting options for the section.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149862" role="listitem">Click <emph>Insert</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145099" role="paragraph">$[officename] automatically updates the contents of the inserted section whenever the source document is changed. To manually update the contents of the section, choose <emph>Tools - Update - Update All</emph>.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp#text_frame"/> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0806e1eb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideusing_hyphenxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Hyphenation</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149695"><bookmark_value>hyphenation;manual/automatic</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>separation, see hyphenation</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>automatic hyphenation in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>manual hyphenation in text</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw transferred 2 entries to hyphen_prevent.xhp</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149695" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="using_hyphen"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp" name="Hyphenation">Hyphenation</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155918" role="paragraph">By default, $[officename] moves words that do not fit on a line to the next line. If you want, you can use automatic or manual hyphenation to avoid this behavior: </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3155864" role="heading" level="2">Automatic Hyphenation</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147414" role="paragraph">Automatic hyphenation inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. This option is only available for paragraph styles and individual paragraphs.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149832" role="heading" level="3">To Automatically Hyphenate Text in a Paragraph</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3148850" role="listitem">Right-click in a paragraph, and choose <emph>Paragraph</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156104" role="listitem">Click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp" name="Text Flow"><emph>Text Flow</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3150101" role="listitem">In the Hyphenation area, select the Automatically check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153121" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149629" role="heading" level="3">To Automatically Hyphenate Text in Multiple Paragraphs</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149644" role="paragraph">If you want to automatically hyphenate more than one paragraph, use a paragraph style.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149956" role="paragraph">For example, enable the automatic hyphenation option for the "Default" paragraph style, and then apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149611" role="listitem">Choose <emph>View - Styles</emph>, and then click the <emph>Paragraph Styles</emph> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149867" role="listitem">Right-click the paragraph style that you want to hyphenate, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145106" role="listitem">Click the Text Flow tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149582" role="listitem">In the <emph>Hyphenation</emph> area, select the <emph>Automatically</emph> check box.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156250" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3145400" role="listitem">Apply the style to the paragraphs that you want to hyphenate.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3145417" role="heading" level="2">Manual Hyphenation</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154400" role="paragraph">You can insert a hyphen where you want on a line, or let $[officename] search for the words to hyphenate, and then offer a suggested hyphenation.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id6587651" role="heading" level="3">To Manually Hyphenate Single Words</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153363" role="paragraph">To quickly insert a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Hyphen(-).</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154244" role="paragraph">If you insert a manual hyphen in a word, the word is only hyphenated at the manual hyphen. No additional automatic hyphenation is applied for this word. A word with a manual hyphen will be hyphenated without regard to the settings on the <emph>Text Flow</emph> tab page.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154847" role="heading" level="3">To Manually Hyphenate Text in a Selection</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154869" role="listitem">Select the text that you want to hyphenate.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155886" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Tools - Language - Hyphenation</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp#using_thesaurus"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp#standard_template"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp#hyphen_prevent"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154361" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp" name="Text Flow">Text Flow</link></paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b84146bc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideusing_numbered_listsxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Adding Bullets</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155186"> + <bookmark_value>unordered lists;turning on and off</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs; bulleted</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>bullets;adding and editing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting;bullets</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>removing;bullets in text documents</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>changing;bulleting symbols</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + +<h1 id="hd_id3155186" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="using_numbered_lists"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp" name="Adding Bullets">Adding Bullets</link></variable></h1> + +<h2 id="hd_id3291116" xml-lang="en-US">To Add Bullets</h2> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149829" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add bullets to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149635" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">On the <menuitem>Formatting</menuitem> Bar, click the <menuitem>Toggle Unordered List</menuitem> icon (<keycode>Shift+F12</keycode>).</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> +<embed href="text/shared/02/06120000.xhp#sytoggle_bullets"/> + +<note id="par_id3145403" xml-lang="en-US">To remove bullets, select the bulleted paragraphs, and then click the <emph>Toggle Unordered List</emph> icon on the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar.</note> + +<h2 id="hd_id3154403" xml-lang="en-US">To Format Bullets</h2> +<list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154416" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To change the formatting of an unordered list, choose <menuitem>Format - Bullets and Numbering</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153390" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click on the <menuitem>Unordered</menuitem> tab or the <menuitem>Image</menuitem> tab, and then select a symbol style in the <menuitem>Selection</menuitem> area.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153399" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">To introduce another bulleting symbol, click on the <item type="menuitem">Customize</item> tab, click the <item type="menuitem">Select</item> button next to <item type="menuitem">Character</item>, then select a special character.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> +<embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp#numbering_paras"/> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..914e71aaa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideusing_numbered_lists2xml" indexer="include" + status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Adding Numbering</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3147418"><bookmark_value>numbering;paragraphs, on and off</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraphs;toggle ordered list</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting;ordered lists</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>inserting;numbering</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<h1 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3147418"><variable id="using_numbered_lists2"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp" name="Adding Numbering">Adding Numbering</link></variable></h1> + <h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id4188970">To Add Numbering to a List</h2> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153396" role="listitem">Select the paragraph(s) that you want to add numbering to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id181615764064889">Do one of the following:</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149968" role="listitem">On the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar, click the <emph>Toggle Ordered List</emph> icon (<keycode>F12</keycode>)</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id211615764184529" role="listitem">Right-click, choose <menuitem>List</menuitem>, then select a list style.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> +<embed href="text/swriter/02/02110000.xhp#synumbering"/> +<tip id="par_id941615766439690">A <link href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp" name="Paragraph Style">paragraph style</link> can be configured to add numbering.</tip> +<h2 id="hd_id861615765870820">To Remove Paragraphs from an Ordered List</h2> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153365" role="paragraph">To remove numbering, select the numbered paragraphs, then click the <emph>Toggle Ordered List</emph> icon or the <emph>No List</emph> icon on the <emph>Formatting</emph> Bar.</paragraph> +<h2 xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3154233">To Format an Ordered List</h2> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154246" role="paragraph">To change the formatting of a numbered list, do one of the following:</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id801615765243022" role="listitem">Click in the list, then choose <menuitem>Format - Bullets and Numbering</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id161615765280165" role="listitem">Right-click in the list, then choose <menuitem>List - Bullets and Numbering</menuitem>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149573" role="paragraph">To change the hierarchy of an ordered list, click in the list, then use the icons in the <emph>Bullets and Numbering</emph> toolbar.</paragraph> + <note id="par_id21611757614734">Copying or moving an item from a numbered list to a new location continues the list numbering. To start a new numbering with the pasted item, click <emph>Toggle Ordered List</emph> twice. Any formatting on the pasted item is reset to default.</note> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp#using_numbering"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp#numbering_paras"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..86fb4b4e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideusing_numberingxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Numbering and Paragraph Styles</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + <bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3155174"> + <bookmark_value>numbering;manually/by styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>list styles</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>manual numbering in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>paragraph styles;numbering</bookmark_value> + </bookmark> + <h1 id="hd_id3155174"><variable id="using_numbering"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbering.xhp" name="Numbering and Numbering Styles">Numbering and Paragraph Styles</link> +</variable></h1> + <paragraph id="par_id3149818" role="paragraph">You can apply numbering to a paragraph manually or with a paragraph style.</paragraph> + <note id="par_id31616154131555">If you want numbered headings, use <menuitem>Tools - </menuitem><link href="text/swriter/01/06060000.xhp" name="chap_num_link">Chapter Numbering</link>, instead of numbering manually.</note> + <h2 id="hd_id6140629">To Apply Numbering Manually</h2> + <paragraph id="par_id3155866" role="listitem">To apply numbering manually, click in the paragraph, and then click the <menuitem>Toggle Ordered List</menuitem> icon on the <menuitem>Formatting</menuitem> bar, or use the dropdown box on the icon to select a numbering format.</paragraph> + <note id="par_id3153405">You cannot apply manual numbering to paragraphs that are listed under "Special Styles" in the Styles window.</note> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10711" role="listitem"><comment>UFI: the following paras moved here from text\shared\01\06050000.xhp</comment>When you press Enter in a numbered or bulleted list, <item type="productname">%PRODUCTNAME</item> automatically numbers the next paragraph. To remove the numbering or bullet from the new paragraph, press Enter again.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1072F" role="listitem">To change the bullets or numbering format for the current paragraph only, select a character or word in the paragraph, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a new format.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN10733" role="listitem">To change the bullet or numbering format for all paragraphs in the list, ensure that the cursor is in the list, choose <item type="menuitem">Format - Bullets and Numbering</item>, and then click a new format.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_idN1073A" role="listitem">Use the commands on the <link href="text/swriter/main0206.xhp" name="Numbering Object Bar">Bullets and Numbering</link> bar to change the order and level of list paragraphs.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph role="listitem" id="par_id791616153048415">To see which paragraphs are in the same list, click to the left of a number or symbol at the beginning of a list paragraph, with <link href="text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp" name="Shadings"><menuitem>View - Field Shadings</menuitem> </link> (<switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><keycode>Command</keycode></caseinline><defaultinline><keycode>Ctrl</keycode></defaultinline></switchinline><keycode>+F8</keycode>) enabled.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <tip id="par_id751615828987862">To add selected paragraphs to an existing list, use <link href="text/swriter/02/add_to_list.xhp" name="Add to Previous List"><menuitem>Format - Lists - Add to List</menuitem></link>.</tip> + + <h2 id="hd_id3153123">To Apply Numbering With a Paragraph Style</h2> + <paragraph id="par_id3153137" role="paragraph">Paragraph Styles give you greater control over numbering that you apply in a document. When you change the list style assigned to a paragraph style, then the numbering format in the list style is applied automatically to all paragraphs using the paragraph style.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149646" role="listitem">Choose <item type="menuitem">View - Styles</item>, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Paragraph Styles</item> icon.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149599" role="listitem">Right-click the paragraph style that you want to apply numbering to, and then choose <emph>Modify</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149850" role="listitem">Click the <item type="menuitem">Outline & List</item> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149874" role="listitem">In the <menuitem>List style</menuitem> box, select the list style to apply.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3145113" role="listitem">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149589" role="listitem">Apply the paragraph style to the paragraphs that you want to add numbering to.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_tab_innumbering.xhp#promotedemote"/> + + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp#join_numbered_lists"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists.xhp#using_numbered_lists"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_numbered_lists2.xhp#using_numbered_lists2"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/auto_numbering.xhp#auto_numbering"/> + <embed href="text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp#numbering_stop"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp#numbering_paras"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp#captions"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/number_sequence.xhp#number_sequence"/> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id401616165733544"><link href="text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp" name="List Style">List Style</link></paragraph> + </section> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..051ec6145 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideusing_thesaurusxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Thesaurus</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3145576"><bookmark_value>thesaurus; related words</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>related words in thesaurus</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>spelling in thesaurus</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>dictionaries; thesaurus</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>lexicon, see thesaurus</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>synonyms in thesaurus</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>searching;synonyms</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> +<section id="thesaurusHead"> + <h1 id="hd_id3145576"><variable id="using_thesaurus"><link href="text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp" name="Thesaurus">Thesaurus</link></variable></h1> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149820" role="paragraph">Use the thesaurus to look up synonyms or related terms.</paragraph> +</section> +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155920" role="listitem">Click in the word that you want to look up or replace.</paragraph> </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3155867" role="listitem">Choose <emph>Tools - Language - Thesaurus</emph>, or press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+F7.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149848" role="listitem">In the Alternatives list, click an entry to copy that related term to the "Replace with" text box.</paragraph> </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3153136" role="listitem">Optionally double-click an entry to look up related terms for that entry. On your keyboard, you can also press the arrow up or down keys to select an entry. Then press Return to replace, or press the spacebar to look up.</paragraph> </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149644" role="listitem">Click <emph>Replace</emph>.</paragraph> </listitem> + </list> + + + + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3156263" role="paragraph">Initially, the thesaurus uses the language of the selected word in the document, if a thesaurus library for that language is installed. The title bar of the Thesaurus dialog displays the language in use.</paragraph> <note id="par_id3145113">To look up the word in a different language, click the Language button, and select one of the installed thesaurus languages. A thesaurus library may not be available for all installed languages. You can install languages with a thesaurus library from the <link href="https://extensions.libreoffice.org/">Extensions</link> web page.</note><paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3196263" role="paragraph">If a thesaurus library is installed for the language of a word, the context menu of the word shows a Synonyms submenu. Select any of the terms from the submenu to replace the word.</paragraph> <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/spellcheck_dialog.xhp#spellcheck_dialog"/> + <embed href="text/swriter/guide/using_hyphen.xhp#using_hyphen"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3154392" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/06020000.xhp" name="Thesaurus">Thesaurus</link></paragraph> </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1fb694dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideword_completionxml" indexer="include"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Word Completion for Text Documents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3148882"><bookmark_value>automatic word completion</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>completion of words</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>AutoCorrect function; word completion</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>word completion;using/disabling</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>disabling;word completion</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>switching off;word completion</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>deactivating;word completion</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>refusing word completions</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>rejecting word completions</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw made a two level entry of "switching off..." and "word completion", copied two entries to word_completion_adjust.xhp and added a new entry</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10751" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="word_completion"><link href="text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp">Word Completion for Text Documents</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1076F" role="paragraph">$[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149346" role="paragraph">If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Tab to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+Shift+Tab. </paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1078D" role="heading" level="2"> To Accept/Reject a Word Completion</paragraph> + <list type="unordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10794" role="listitem">By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. </paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1079B" role="listitem"> To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. </paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN1079E" role="heading" level="2"> To Switch off the Word Completion </paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107A5" role="listitem"> Choose <item type="menuitem">Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion</item>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107AD" role="listitem"> Uncheck <emph>Enable word completion</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id7504806" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp">Fine-Tuning the Word Completion</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..798296486 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguideword_completion_adjustxhp" indexer="include" + status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3148882"><bookmark_value>settings;word completion</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>word completion;settings</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text documents;word completion settings</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>weekdays; automatically completing</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>months; automatically completing</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>mw copied two entries from word_completion.xhp and created three new entries</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id4745017" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="word_completion_adjust"><link href="text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp">Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents</link> +</variable></paragraph><comment>MW created this guide by splitting word_completion.xhp</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id4814294" role="paragraph">If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behavior. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2593462" role="paragraph">To fine-tune the word completion choose <item type="menuitem">Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion</item> and select any of the following options:</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107C6" role="heading" level="2">To Insert an Additional Space Character</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B03" role="paragraph">Select <emph>Append space</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B0E" role="note">The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107CC" role="heading" level="2">To Define the Accept Key</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B20" role="paragraph">Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the <emph>Accept with</emph> list box.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107D2" role="heading" level="2">To Select the Minimum Number of Characters</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B36" role="paragraph">Use the <emph>Min. word length</emph> box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107D8" role="heading" level="2">To Select the Scope of Collected Words</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B4C" role="paragraph">Disable the option <emph>When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list</emph>.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B53" role="paragraph">Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B56" role="paragraph">If you enable the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id2634968" role="paragraph">If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107DE" role="heading" level="2">To Use the Word List for Further Sessions</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10B94" role="note">If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10BA1" role="paragraph">Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature.</paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10BA7" role="listitem">Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10BAB" role="listitem">The word completion feature collects the words.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107ED" role="listitem">Select all or some of the words in the list.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN107F4" role="listitem">Use <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC">Command +</caseinline><defaultinline>Ctrl</defaultinline></switchinline>+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10BC6" role="listitem">Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="relatedtopics"> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN10809" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/06040600.xhp">Word Completion</link></paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id5458845" role="paragraph"><link href="text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp">Using Word Completion</link></paragraph> + </section> + </body> +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3d6b0346 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> + +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidewords_countxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">Counting Words</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp</filename> + </topic> + </meta> + <body> +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3149686"><bookmark_value>words; counting in text</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>number of words</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>documents; number of words/characters</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; number of words/characters</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>characters; counting</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>number of characters</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>counting words</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>word counts</bookmark_value> +</bookmark><comment>MW deleted "character counts"</comment> +<paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id3149686" role="heading" level="1"><variable id="words_count"><link href="text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp" name="Counting Words">Counting Words</link> +</variable></paragraph> + <list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN105D1" role="listitem">Word and character count is shown in the status bar, and is kept up to date as you edit.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106D1" role="listitem">If you want to count only some text of your document, select the text.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3149821" role="listitem">To display extended statistics such as count of characters without spaces, double click the word count in the status bar, or choose <emph>Tools - Word Count</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> + </list> + <section id="how"> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="hd_id1116200901133957" role="heading" level="2">How does %PRODUCTNAME count words?</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1116200901133998" role="paragraph">In general, every string of characters between two spaces is a word. Dashes, tabs, line breaks, and paragraph breaks are word limits, too.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id1116200901133985" role="paragraph">Words with always visible hyphens, as in plug-in, add-on, user/config, are counted as one word each.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id111620090113399" role="paragraph">The words can be a mix of letters, numbers, and special characters. So the following text counts as four words: abc123 1.23 "$" http://www.example.com.</paragraph> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id111620090113400" role="paragraph">To add a custom character to be considered as the word limit, choose <switchinline select="sys"><caseinline select="MAC"><emph>%PRODUCTNAME - Preferences</emph></caseinline><defaultinline><emph>Tools - Options</emph></defaultinline></switchinline><emph> - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General</emph> and add the character into the <emph>Additional separators</emph> field.</paragraph> + </section> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_idN106E2" role="tip">To get some more statistics about the document, choose <emph>File - Properties - Statistics</emph>.</paragraph> + <embed href="text/shared/00/00000004.xhp#related"/> + <paragraph xml-lang="en-US" id="par_id3147418" role="paragraph"><link href="text/shared/01/01100400.xhp" name="File - Properties - Statistics">File - Properties - Statistics</link></paragraph> + </body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a81260620 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . +--> + +<meta> + <topic id="textswriterguidewrapxml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title id="tit" xml-lang="en-US">Wrapping Text Around Objects</title> + <filename>/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> + +<body> + +<bookmark xml-lang="en-US" branch="index" id="bm_id3154486"> + <bookmark_value>text wrap around objects</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>contour editor</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>contour wrap</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>text; formatting around objects</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>formatting; contour wrap</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>objects; contour wrap</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>wrapping text;editing contours</bookmark_value> + <bookmark_value>editors;contour editor</bookmark_value> +</bookmark> + + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154486" role="heading" level="1" xml-lang="en-US"><variable id="wrap"><link href="text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp" name="Wrapping Text Around Objects">Wrapping Text Around Objects</link></variable></paragraph> + +<paragraph id="hd_id4792321" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Wrap Text Around an Object</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3149696" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the object.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3155907" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Frame and Object - Properties</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp" name="Wrap"><emph>Wrap</emph></link> tab to choose the wrapping style that you want to apply.</paragraph> + <paragraph id="par_id3155859" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3149834" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Specify the Wrapping Properties</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154079" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the object.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153396" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Choose <emph>Format - Frame and Object - Properties</emph>, and then click the <link href="text/swriter/01/05060200.xhp" name="Wrap"><emph>Wrap</emph></link> tab.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="3"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153370" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Set the options that you want.</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3153386" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Click <emph>OK</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<paragraph id="hd_id3154247" role="heading" level="2" xml-lang="en-US">To Change the Wrapping Contour of a Graphic</paragraph> +<paragraph id="par_id3154262" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US">You can change the shape that the text wraps around.</paragraph> + +<list type="ordered"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3154860" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose <emph>Wrap - Edit Contour</emph>.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<list type="ordered" startwith="2"> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150231" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the <item type="menuitem">Apply</item> icon (green check mark).</paragraph> + </listitem> + <listitem> + <paragraph id="par_id3150947" role="listitem" xml-lang="en-US">Close the <item type="menuitem">Contour Editor</item> window.</paragraph> + </listitem> +</list> + +<section id="relatedtopics"> +<embed href="text/swriter/guide/insert_graphic.xhp#insert_graphic"/> +<paragraph id="par_id3150520" role="paragraph" xml-lang="en-US"><link href="text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp" name="Contour Editor">Contour Editor</link></paragraph> +</section> +</body> + +</helpdocument>
\ No newline at end of file |